Catia V5 Mechanical Design Solutions 2

Generative Drafting

Version 5 Release 12

© Dassault Systèmes. 1994-2003 All rights reserved.

Preface Using This Guide Where to Find More Information Conventions What's New Getting Started Defining the Drawing Sheet Opening a Part Creating a Front View Creating a Projection View Creating a Section View Creating a Detail View Creating a Section Cut Basic Tasks Drawing Management Creating a New Drawing Opening a Drawing Loading/Saving a Drawing (Resolved Link) Loading/Saving a Drawing (Unresolved Link) Updating Drawings Via the Batch Monitor File Export and Import DXF/DWG: Import DXF/DWG: Export DXF/DWG: Report File DXF/DWG: Trouble Shooting DXF/DWG: Best Practices DXF/DWG: FAQ DXF/DWG: VBScript Macros CGM: Insertion CGM: Export http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/CATIAfr_C2/draugCATIAfrs.htm (1 of 7)10/19/2004 5:43:25 PM

Generative Drafting

Generative Drafting

Sheets Defining a Sheet Modifying a Sheet Creating a Frame and Title Block Inserting an Image Into a Frame and Title Block Managing a Background View View Creation Before You Begin Creating a Front View Creating an Advanced Front View Creating a Projection View Creating an Unfolded View Creating a View from 3D Creating an Auxiliary View Creating an Offset Section View / Cut Creating a Section View / Cut (Planar Surface) Creating an Aligned Section View / Cut Creating a Section View / Cut with Profile Defined in 3D Creating a Detail View / Detail View Profile Creating a Quick Detail View / Quick Detail View Profile Creating a Clipping View / Clipping View Profile Creating an Isometric View Creating an Exploded View Creating a Broken View Creating a Breakout View Creating Views via the Wizard View Modification Before you begin Moving a View Positioning a View Positioning a View Independently of its Reference View Creating a View from 3D Isolating Generated Views Restoring Deleted Elements Locking a View Scaling a View Renaming a View Adding a Generative Bill of Material

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/CATIAfr_C2/draugCATIAfrs.htm (2 of 7)10/19/2004 5:43:25 PM

Generative Drafting

Generating Balloons on a View Showing Geometry in Views Modifying a Callout Graphism Modifying a Callout Geometry Modifying Cut Elements in a Section View Modifying a Pattern Duplicating Generative Geometry Generative View Styles Creating a View using Generative View Styles Switching a View to Another Generative View Style Applying the Generative Style of a View to Another View Applying a Generative View Style to a View Dimension Generation About Dimension Generation Generating Dimensions in One Shot Filtering Dimension Generation Generating Dimensions Semi-Automatically Analyzing Generated Dimensions Positioning Dimensions (View per View) Analyzing Interfering Dimensions Driving 3D Constraints via Generated Dimensions Dimension Manipulation Before You Begin Creating Dimensions Creating Half-Dimensions Creating Cumulated Dimensions Creating Stacked Dimensions Creating Explicit Dimensions Creating/Modifying Angle Dimensions Creating Chamfer Dimensions Creating Associative Thread Dimensions Creating/Modifying Coordinate Dimensions Creating a Holes Dimensions Table Creating a Points Coordinates Table Creating/Modifying Radius Curvature Dimensions Creating Overall Curve Dimensions Creating Curvilinear Length Dimensions Creating Dimensions along a Reference Direction


Generative Drafting

Creating Dimensions between Intersection Points Creating Dimensions between an Element and a View Axis Re-routing Dimensions Modifying the Dimension Type Interrupting Extension Lines Modifying the Dimension Value Text Position Modifying the Dimension Line Location Specifying the Dimension Value Position Adding Text Before/After the Dimension Value Modifying the Dimensions Overrun/Blanking Lining up Dimensions (Free Space) Lining up Dimensions (Reference) Creating a Datum Feature Modifying a Datum Feature Creating a Geometrical Tolerance Modifying Geometrical Tolerances Copying Geometrical Tolerances Creating Driving Dimensions Creating Associative Thread Dimensions Annotations Before You Begin Creating a Free Text Creating an Associated Text Making an Existing Annotation Associative Creating a Text With a Leader Adding a Leader to an Existing Annotation Handling Annotation Leaders Adding Frames or Sub-Frames Replicating Text and Attribute Copying Graphic Properties Creating a Datum Target Modifying a Datum Target Creating a Balloon Creating Associative Balloons on Generated Product Views Modifying a Balloon Creating a Roughness Symbol Creating a Welding Symbol Creating a Geometry Weld


Generative Drafting

Modifying Annotation Positioning Creating/Modifying a Table Finding and Replacing Text Performing an Advanced Search Querying Object Links Dress-Up Elements Creating Center Lines (No Reference) Creating Center Lines (Reference) Modifying Center Lines Creating Threads (No Reference) Creating Threads (Reference) Creating Axis Lines Creating Axis Lines and Center Lines Creating an Area Fill Creating Arrows Properties Editing View Properties Editing 2D Geometry Feature Properties Editing 2D Element Graphic Properties Editing Pattern Properties Editing Annotation Font Properties Editing Text Properties Editing Dimension Text Properties Editing Dimension Value Properties Editing Dimension Tolerance Properties Editing Dimension Extension Line Properties Editing Dimension Line Properties Editing 2D Component Instance Properties Images Inserting Images (Raster or Vector) Editing Raster Images Interoperability Creating and Modifying Views from a .Model Printing a Document Printing a Document Quickly Printing a Document After Modifying Current Display Settings Administration Tasks Before you begin http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/CATIAfr_C2/draugCATIAfrs.htm (5 of 7)10/19/2004 5:43:25 PM

Generative Drafting

Administering Generative View Styles and Standards Setting Generative View Style Parameters Before you begin Generate Parameters View Dress-Up parameters Workbench Description Command Board Menu Bar Toolbars Drawing Views Generative View Style Dimension Generation Customizing for Drafting General Settings View and Sheet Layout Settings View Generation Settings Generation Geometry Creation Settings Dimension Creation Manipulators Settings Annotation and Dress-up Settings Administration Toolbars Glossary Index

Preface Version 5 Generative Drafting is a new generation product that provides users with powerful functionalities to generate drawings from 3D parts and assembly definitions. This User's Guide is intended for users who need to generate such drawings. Users will also learn how apply dimensions, annotations and dress-up elements to the drawing.


Generative Drafting

Using This Guide Where to Find More Information Conventions


Preface

Preface Version 5 Generative Drafting is a new generation product that provides users with powerful functionalities to generate drawings from 3D parts and assembly definitions. This User's Guide is intended for users who need to generate such drawings. Users will also learn how apply dimensions, annotations and dress-up elements to the drawing.

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/draug_C2/draugpr01.htm (1 of 2)10/19/2004 5:43:41 PM

Preface

Using This Guide Where to Find More Information Conventions

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/draug_C2/draugpr01.htm (2 of 2)10/19/2004 5:43:41 PM

Using This Guide

Using This Guide This User's Guide is intended for users who needs to become quickly familiar with the Generative Drafting Version 5 product. Before reading it, the user should be familiar with basic Version 5 concepts such as document windows, standard and view toolbars. To get the most out of this guide, we suggest you start reading and performing the step-bystep tutorial Getting Started. This tutorial will show you how to define a drawing sheet and create views from a 3D part. Once you have finished, you should move on to the next sections where you will find detailed explanations regarding the handling of drawing and sheets, view creation and modification, dimension generation, etc. You can also take a look at the Workbench Description section describing the Generative Drafting workbench. To perform the scenarios, you will use sample documents contained in the C:\Program Files \Dassault Systemes\Bxxdoc\English\online\cfysa\samples\Drafting folder (where xx in Bxxdoc stands for the current release number). For more information on accessing sample documents, refer to Accessing Sample Documents in the Infrastructure User's Guide. [ Up ] [ Next ]

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/draug_C2/draugpr02.htm10/19/2004 5:43:50 PM

Where to Find More Information

Where to Find More Information Prior to reading this book, we recommend that you read:

●

Infrastructure User's Guide

●

Sketcher User's Guide

●

Part Design User's Guide

●

the Conventions chapter

. [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/draug_C2/draugpr03.htm10/19/2004 5:44:38 PM

Conventions

Conventions Certain conventions are used in CATIA, ENOVIA & DELMIA documentation to help you recognize and understand important concepts and specifications. The following text conventions may be used: The titles of CATIA documents appear in this manner throughout the text. File -> New identifies the commands to be used. The use of the mouse differs according to the type of action you need to perform. Use this mouse button, whenever you read Select (menus, commands, geometry in graphics area, ...) Click (icons, dialog box buttons, tabs, selection of a location in the document window, ...) Double-click Shift-click Ctrl-click Check (check boxes) Drag Drag and drop (icons onto objects, objects onto objects) Drag Move Right-click (to select contextual menu)

Graphic conventions are denoted as follows: indicates the estimated time to accomplish a task. indicates a target of a task. indicates the prerequisites. indicates the scenario of a task. indicates tips indicates a warning. indicates information.

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/icons_C2/conventions.htm (1 of 3)10/19/2004 5:45:10 PM

Conventions

indicates basic concepts. indicates methodological information. indicates reference information. indicates information regarding settings, customization, etc. indicates the end of a task. indicates functionalities that are new or enhanced with this Release. Enhancements can also be identified by a blue-colored background in the lefthand margin or on the text itself. indicates functionalities that are P1-specific. indicates functionalities that are P2-specific. indicates functionalities that are P3-specific. allows you to switch back the full-window viewing mode.

These icons in the table of contents correspond to the entries or mode. "Site Map". "Split View" mode. "What's New". "Preface". "Getting Started". "Basic Tasks". "User Tasks" or the "Advanced Tasks". "Workbench Description". "Customizing". "Reference".


Conventions

"Methodology". "Glossary". "Index".


What's New

What's New? New Functionalities Locating reference/resulting views Two new contextual commands now let you navigate easily between reference/ resulting views in the case of section views, section cuts, auxiliary views or detail views. The Locate Reference View command reframes the drawing viewer on the reference (i. e. parent) view of a section view, section cut, auxiliary view or detail view. The Locate Resulting View command, available in the contextual menu of a callout, reframes on the resulting (i.e. child) section view, section cut, auxiliary view or detail view. Aligned section view and section cut, offset section view and section cut You can now generate aligned section views, aligned section cuts, offset section views and offset section cuts as defined in the Functional Tolerancing and Annotation workbench. DXF import and export New and enhanced functionalities are available regarding DXF import and export. These functionalities are documented in the Data Exchange Interface User's Guide.

Enhanced Functionalities View from 3D Hidden geometry management Extracted annotations attached to geometry that is not displayed in 2D views are now highlighted. 2D ditto Note Object Attribute extraction 2D ditto Note Object Attributes are now generated in views from 3D.

Generative View Styles 3D properties inheritance of projected geometry Using generative view styles, you can now apply 3D linetype, thickness & color to projected geometry (wireframe, solid, 3D points). Importing a newer version of a generative view style file You can now import a newer version of a generative view style into a drawing. Doing this will completely override the older version of the generative view style in all views which use this generative view style. This functionality is particularly useful if you created views in V5 R11 using the generative view styles provided by default with the application, and want to benefit from the new styles parameters that were added in http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/draug_C2/draugwn.htm (1 of 2)10/19/2004 5:46:23 PM

What's New

V5 R12.

Miscellaneous Dimension generation on Part Design user-defined feature You can now generate dimensions from Part Design user-defined features. Thread ASME/ISO Fractional representation A fractional dimension will now be generated for threads/taps defined in a 3D part (Part Design) which use standards with fraction as a symbolic representation (e.g. G1/8).

Customizing Settings View generation in Approximate mode You can now generate views in Approximate mode. This generation mode is particularly well-adapted to large assemblies as memory consumption is dramatically reduced and performances are improved. View generation in raster mode When generating views in raster mode, you can now add shading or shading with edges, as well as use dynamic hidden line removal. You can also choose between three pre-defined and a custom mode to set the level of detail that will be used to visualize and to print the drawing.

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/draug_C2/draugwn.htm (2 of 2)10/19/2004 5:46:23 PM

Getting Started

Getting Started Before getting into the detailed instructions for using Generative Drafting, the following tutorial aims at giving you a feel of what you can do with the product. It provides a step-bystep scenario showing you how to use key functionalities. The main tasks covered in this section are the following: Defining the Drawing Sheet Opening a Part Creating a Front View Creating a Projection View Creating a Section View Creating a Detail View Creating a Section Cut

Before you begin, make sure you customize the following settings: Grid: De-activate the Grid icon

from the Tools toolbar (bottom right).

View names and scaling factors: Go to Tools->Options (Mechanical Design -> Drafting option at the left of the dialog box, Layout tab) and un-check the View name and Scaling factor options.

This step-by-step scenario introduces the basic capabilities of Generative Drafting. You just need to follow the instructions as you progress along. At the end of this getting started, you will be able to print the following sheet:

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/draug_C2/drauggs01.htm (1 of 2)10/19/2004 5:46:30 PM

Getting Started

Before discovering this scenario, you should be familiar with the basic commands common to all workbenches. These are described in the Infrastructure User's Guide.


Defining the Drawing Sheet

Defining the Drawing Sheet This task shows you how to define the drawing sheet to be used for creating the views described in further tasks.

1.

Click the New icon

from the Standard toolbar or select File -> New... from

the menu bar.

2.

Select Drawing from the List of Types and click OK.

3.

From the New Drawing dialog box, select the ISO standard, and the A0 ISO format. In this particular case, and all along the guide, we use the ISO standard.


Defining the Drawing Sheet

You can add an unlimited number of customized standards using Standard files that you will create and/or, if needed, modify. Once created, this standard will appear in the New Drawing dialog box. For more details on standards, see the Standards Administration section. Care that any user-defined standard is based on one of the four international standards (ANSI, ISO, ASME or JIS) as far as basic parameters are concerned.

4.

Click OK.

5.

In the Generative Drafting workbench, a grid is set by default. Throughout this documentation, we decided not to display the grid. To do this, de-activate the from the Tools toolbar (bottom right). Grid icon The drawing sheet appears as shown here:

From now on, you will work on the created sheet unless you define a new sheet.

[ Up ] [ Next ]


Opening a Part

Opening a Part This task will show you how to open the part to be used in the Generative Drafting workbench to create views. You may use either a 3D part or an assembly.

Before you begin and all along the current Getting Started chapter, make sure you customize the following settings: Grid: De-activate the Grid icon

1. Click the Open icon


from the Standard toolbar or select File->Open... from

the menu bar.

The File Selection dialog box appears. 2. Select the part to be opened. In this example, the user selects the GenDrafting_part.CATPart document.


Opening a Part

3. Click Open. The part is opened and will remain displayed in the window whatever the views you will create from this part.


Opening a Part

[ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]


Creating a Front View

Creating a Front View This task will show you how to create a front view on the sheet previously defined and from the 3D part you previously opened.

At this step, we strongly advise that you tile screen horizontally . For this, go to Window -> Tile Horizontally options from the menu bar.

If you do not want to have the specification tree displayed, press the F3 key.

1. Click the Drawing window, and click the Front View icon the Views toolbar (Projections sub-toolbar).


from


2. Select the desired planar surface of the 3D part you opened, from the 3D Part viewer.

Blue arrows and a green frame including a preview of the view to be created appear on the sheet. These frame and arrows let you define the location and orientation of the view to be created. As long as you see the green frame, you can define the frame position using the blue manipulators: top, bottom, left, right or rotated according to a given snapping, or else according to an edited rotation angle.

3. Click on the drawing sheet or at the center of the blue manipulator to generate the view. The front view is created.

In the Generative Drafting workbench, the view name, scaling factor and view frame are set by default. Throughout this documentation, we decided not to display view names and scaling factors.



To do this, go to Tools->Options->Mechanical Design->Drafting option (Layout tab) and un-check the View name and Scaling factor options.

By default, a number of elements can be visualized on generated views. If needed, go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> View tab and un-check the unwanted options.



Creating a Projection View

Creating a Projection View This task will show you how to create projection views on the sheet. 1.

Click the Drawing window and click the from the Views Projection View icon toolbar (Projections sub-toolbar).

A preview of the view to be created appears. By default, the projection view is aligned to the front view. As you move the cursor, a preview of the view to be created appears, as long as you keep the cursor positioned at any possible projection view location (at the left, right, top or bottom of the red frame).

2.

Define the projection view position, for example the right view position, using the cursor.



Note that the left view shown here was created and therefore positioned according to ISO standards and the First Angle Projection method. For more information, refer to Creating Views via the Wizard.

3.

Click to generate the view.

4.

Click the Projection View icon

5.

Use the cursor to define the projection view position, for example the bottom view position, and click to generate the view.

once again.

The views result as shown here.



Creating a Section View

Creating a Section View This task will show you how to create a section view using the front view previously generated. This section view will make drawings more readable by replacing the hidden elements of parts, including holes, with filled areas.

1.

Click the Drawing window, and click the from the Offset Section View icon Views toolbar (Sections sub-toolbar).

2.

Select the holes and points required for sketching the callout on the view. Selecting a circular edge, a linear edge, an axis line or a center line (for example, a hole) amounts to making the callout associative by default to the 3D feature. If you select a circle, the callout will go through the circle center. If you select an edge, the callout will be parallel to the selected edge.



If you are not satisfied with the profile you create, you can, at any time, use the or Redo icons. Undo Note that SmartPick assists you when creating the profile. The section plane appears at the second point you select and moves dynamically on the 3D part as you create the callout on the drawing. This section plane will automatically disappear as you will double-click to end the callout creation.



3.

Double-click to end the cutting profile creation. Positioning the view amounts to defining the section view direction. The callout blue arrows direction is modified according to the cursor position. In other words, this preview behaves as if it were either a left or a right projection view you need to position.



4.

Click to generate the view. Using the cursor, you can then position the section view so that it is or not aligned to the front view.

The patterns which are used to represent the section are defined in the standards. For more information, refer to Pattern Definition in the Interactive Drafting User's Guide. You may modify the pattern (hatching, dotting, coloring or motif) by rightclicking the pattern and selecting Properties from the contextual menu. This will display the Properties dialog box in which you may either select a new pattern or modify some graphical attributes of the existing pattern. For more information, refer to Modifying a Pattern.



Creating a Detail View

Creating a Detail View This task will show you how to create a detail view from the front view you previously generated. 1.

Click the Drawing window, and click the Detail View icon

from the Views

toolbar (Details sub-toolbar).

2.

Click where you want to position the callout center.

3.

Drag the cursor and then click to specify the callout radius.

A blue circle appears at the position of the cursor.

4.

Move the previewed detail view to the desired location.

5.

Click inside the blue circle to position the detail view at the desired location.



6.

If you are not satisfied with the position of the detail view, you can drag it to a new position.



As shown above, the scale by default is twice that of the active view. You can modify this scale. 7.

To do this, right-click the detail view, select Properties from the contextual menu and then the View tab, enter 4 as Scale and click OK.

For the purpose of this exercise, you will now add a dimension to the detail view.

8.

To do this, click the Dimensions icon from the Dimensioning toolbar.

9.

Click both required elements in the view as shown here.

The dimension is created:





Creating a Section Cut

Creating a Section Cut This task will show you how to create a section cut from the detail view you just created.

Be careful: the scale of the section cut will depend on the scale of the view this section cut is generated from. In this case, the section cut is generated from a detail view with a scale 4: The section cut scale will also be 4.

1. Right-click the detail view and select the Activate View option from the contextual menu.

2. Select the Drawing window, and click the Aligned Section Cut icon from the Views toolbar (Sections sub-toolbar).

3. Select the holes and points required for sketching the cutting profile. Selecting a circular edge, a linear edge, an axis line or a center line (for example, a hole) amounts to making the cutting profile associative by default to the 3D feature. If you select a circle, the profile will go through the circle center. If you select an edge, the profile will be parallel to the selected edge.

If you are not satisfied with the profile you create, you can, at any time, use the Undo

or Redo

icons.

Note that SmartPick assists you when creating the profile.

4. Double-click to end the cutting profile creation. A preview with the view to be created appears. Positioning the section cut either to the right or to the left amounts to defining the section cut direction (as if it were a projection view).



5. Click to generate the section cut.

Once you have clicked, you can modify the position of the section cut relatively to the detail view on the condition by right-clicking the section cut and selecting View Positioning -> Position Independently of Reference View from the contextual menu.

You can select an existing edge within the view and define automatically the direction of the cutting profile. You can also select a reference plane in 3D or a 3D wireframe plane. For more information, please refer to Creating an Offset Section Cut/Section View.

In this particular case, we will add a dimension to the detail view. For this:

6. Add a diameter dimension to the section cut by clicking one edge only. In this case, we applied a higher font size to the dimension value.

The patterns which are used to represent the section are defined in the standards. For more information, refer to Pattern Definition in the Interactive Drafting User's Guide.



You may modify the pattern (hatching, dotting, coloring or motif) by right-clicking the pattern and selecting Properties from the contextual menu. This will display the Properties dialog box in which you may either select a new pattern or modify some graphical attributes of the existing pattern. For more information, refer to Modifying a Pattern.

Now the resulting sheet is as shown here. Note that in this case, we re-positioned the views.

You can now print this sheet. For this, select File -> Print from the menu bar. Make sure the print format of the current sheet is the same as the print format of the printer.

[ Back ] [ Up ]


Basic Tasks

Basic Tasks The Generative Drafting workbench provides a simple method to create and modify views on a predefined sheet. You may also add, modify and/or delete dress-up and 2D elements to these views. All this is performed on a sheet which may include a frame and a title block and will eventually be printed. Note that you may work on DXF imported files. These files will then be exported.

Before you begin, make sure you customize the following settings: ●

●

Grid: de-activate the Grid icon


View names and scaling factors: go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting at the left of the dialog box and click on the Layout tab. Un-check the View name and Scaling factor options.

The Command (and Option) Board is provided as a useful help for easily knowing about, and finding out, toolbar icons and properties. Drawing Management File Export and Import Sheets View Creation View Modification Generative View Styles Dimension Generation Dimension Manipulation Annotations Dress-Up Elements Properties Images Interoperability Printing a Document

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/draug_C2/draugbt0000.htm10/20/2004 5:06:16 PM

Drawing Management

Drawing Management The Generative Drafting workbench lets you manage CATDrawing documents.

Create a New Drawing Create a CATDrawing document. Open a Drawing Open a CATDrawing document. Load/Save a Drawing (Resolved Link) Load and save a CATDrawing document from an existing CATPart document, CATProduct document, sheet metal part or a .model V4/V5 document, when all the links that exist between the referenced document and the CATDrawing document are resolved as you choose to load the referenced document. Load/Save a Drawing (Unresolved Link) Load and save a CATDrawing document from an existing CATPart document, CATProduct document, sheet metal part or a .model V4/V5 document, when all the links that exist between the referenced document and the CATDrawing document are unresolved as you choose not to load the referenced document. Update Drawings via the Batch Monitor Update a list of CATDrawing documents using the batch monitor. [ Up ] [ Next ]


Creating a New Drawing

Creating a New Drawing This task will show you how to create more or less automatically a new drawing with pre-defined views generated from a part. Open the GenDrafting_part.CATPart document. 1. Select the Start -> Mechanical Design commands. 2. Select the Drafting workbench.

The New Drawing Creation dialog box appears with information on views that can possibly be created, as well as information on the drawing standards.

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/draug_C2/draugbt0150.htm (1 of 4)10/20/2004 5:06:38 PM


3. Select the views you want to be automatically created on your drawing from the New Drawing Creation dialog box. 4. Click OK. You can modify the drawing standards. For this, click the Modify button. Be careful: the New Drawing Creation dialog box only displays on the condition you previously opened a CATPart document.



These are the resulting views generated as you start creating the CATDrawing, from the opened CATPart.

BE CAREFUL: if the color of the part is white and the Inherit 3D colors option checked, the generated views will result white and therefore not necessarily properly visualized.

The resulting view position will depend on the CATPart you loaded before starting the Drafting workbench. In other words, the views will be positioned according to: ● a plane you possibly selected in the part. ● ●

a planar surface you possibly selected in the part. xy coordinates, in case you did not open a CATPart beforehand. In this case, you will only be able to define the drawing standards via the New Drawing dialog box.



[ Up ] [ Next ]


Opening a Drawing

Opening a Drawing This task will show you how to open a CATDrawing document. For more details on opening documents, refer to the Infrastructure User's Guide. 1. Click the Open icon

from the Standards toolbar, or select File -> Open.

2. Select the document to be opened. In this case, open GenDrafting_part. CATDrawing.

The GenDrafting_part.CATDrawing document opens as shown below:


Opening a Drawing



Loading/Saving a Drawing (Resolved Link)

Loading/Saving a Drawing (Resolved Link) This task will show you how to load and save a CATDrawing document from an existing CATPart document. Use the same methodology to save a CATProduct, a sheet metal Part or a .model V4/V5 document. In this particular case, all the links that exist between the CATPart document and the CATDrawing document will be resolved as you will choose to load the referenced document. You can now modify your CATPart choosing not to update the related CATDrawing document. It is now possible to customize the settings.

Go to Tools -> Options -> General, click on the General tab, and make sure the Load referenced documents option (default option) is actually checked. Then, click OK.

1.

Open the GenDrafting_part_links.CATDrawing document.

Make sure the specification tree actually appears as shown above. In other words, make sure the symbols are not broken which would means that links between the CATPart and the projection views are unresolved.


Loading/Saving a Drawing (Resolved Link)

2.

Select the Edit->Links command. The Links dialog box appears with the existing links between the CATDrawing and its related CATPart. In our example, this corresponds to links applied to the front, top and right views which are found and loaded (currently displayed in our session).

3.

Click OK.



Loading/Saving a Drawing (Unresolved Link)

Loading/Saving a Drawing (Unresolved Link) This task will show you how to load and save a CATDrawing document from an existing CATPart document. Use the same methodology to load a CATProduct, a sheet metal Part or a .model V4/V5 document. In this particular case, all the links that exist between the CATDrawing document and the CATPart will be unresolved as you will choose not to load the referenced document. You can now modify your CATPart choosing not to update the related CATDrawing document.

Go to Tools->Options-> General, click on the General tab, and uncheck the Load referenced documents option (option set by default). Click OK and re-start the software.

1. Open the GenDrafting_part.CATDrawing document. If the CATPart does not exist at all, the following message will appear simultaneously: "The following links could not be found or contain wrong information".



Make sure the specification tree actually appears as shown here. In other words, the specification tree shows that the links between the CATPart and the projection views are not resolved.

2. Select the Edit->Links command. The Links dialog box appears with the existing links between the CATDrawing and its related CATPart. In this example, this corresponds to links applied to the front, rear, top, bottom, left, right and isometric views. These links are not found (although currently displayed in our session). This means the following commands are no longer available: Projection View, Dressup and Dimension. Still, you can modify the graphic properties of the elements.

3. Select the line corresponding to the link to be solved.



4. If needed, click the button from the Links dialog box. You can now solve the links in the current session. What you can also do is change the source in order to re-define the link and assign it to an equivalent part.

5. Press OK.

For more details: ●

●

At any time, you can select one feature and open or change the source (CATPart) corresponding to this feature. For more details, see Infrastructure User's Guide. The Search Order capability allows you to solve links. For more details, see Infrastructure User's Guide.



Updating Drawings Via the Batch Monitor

Updating Drawings Via the Batch Monitor This task will show you how to update a list of CATDrawing documents. To do this, you will use the batch monitor. The batch monitor lets you create as many batch configurations as required, and follow the progress of an update. Updating drawings via the batch monitor will be particularly helpful if you need to update a great number of drawings (but do not need to visualize them while doing so), or drawings which require large CPU resources. For more details on using the batch monitor, refer to Using the Batch Monitor in the Infrastructure User's Guide. 1. Run the CATUTIL command, using one of the methods described in the Infrastructure User's Guide. For example, from a V5 session, choose Tools -> Utility. The batch monitor appears, listing available batches. At this point, you either need to define the batch parameters that will be used to launch drawing update (this is the case if this is the first time you are using the batch monitor for drawing update), or you can run the batch directly (this is the case if you already defined all the necessary data).

Defining the batch parameters Defining the update batch parameters consists in selecting the files to update, optionally specifying the files for which you want to force the update, and indicating the directory where the updated files should be saved. 2. From the list of available batches, double-click UpdateBatch (you can also right-click UpdateBatch and select New parameters file). The UpdateBatch dialog box is displayed.



3. Click the Choose Files button to select the files that you want to update by batch. A selection dialog box is displayed. 4. Browse to the directory (on your computer or on your network) which contains the files that you want to include, select these files, and click Open. The selected files are now listed in the UpdateBatch dialog box. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 if you want to include files from another directory. You can remove files from the list of the files to update. To do so, select the unwanted file and click the Remove Files button.

6. By default, the files which do not need to be updated will not be. However, you can decide to force the update for certain files, or for all of them. To do this, double-click on No in the Force Update colum for each file for which you want to force the update. The value is now set to Yes, which means the update will be forced. 7. Click the [...] button next to the Target field to select the directory in which you want the updated files to be saved. A dialog box is displayed. 8. Browse to the directory in which you want to save the updated files, select it and click OK. Your update batch parameters are now defined. Each time you run the update batch, updated files present in this target directory will be overwritten by the newly updated files.



9. Click the Save button to specify where you want to save your batch parameters. A dialog box is displayed. 10. Browse to the directory in which you want to save the batch parameters file, specify a file name in the appropriate field, and click Save. Your parameters are saved in an xml file. 11. You can now either click Run to run the batch immediately or click Cancel to close the UpdateBatch dialog box and run the batch later. For the purpose of this scenario, click Cancel. You can now exit the batch monitor. To play the scenario below, however, you will need to re-open the batch monitor.

Running the batch Once you have defined batch parameters in an xml file, you can run the batch. 2. From the list of available batches, right-click UpdateBatch and select Associate a parameters file.



A selection dialog box is displayed. 3. Browse to the directory in which you previously saved the xml batch parameters file, select this file, and click Open to validate. 4. Access the Start tab which now displays the name and location of the file you just associated to the batch.

5. Right-click the batch and select Run. The batch execution starts. 6. During or after the batch execution, you can get more information on the process in the Processes tab: the batch name, the batch identification number, the status (in progress or ended) as well as the start and end time. When the batch execution is over, you can exit the batch monitor.

[ Back ] [ Up ]


File Export and Import

File Export and Import The Generative Drafting workbench lets you export and import different types of files.

Note that these tasks, which deal with data exchange, are actually documented in the Data Exchange Interfaces User's Guide.

DXF/DWG: Import Import or insert the 2D geometric data contained in a DXF or DWG file into a CATDrawing document. DXF/DWG: Export Export the data contained in a CATDrawing document into a DXF file. DXF/DWG: Report File Learn more about the report file. DXF/DWG: Trouble Shooting Learn how to troubleshoot DXF/DWG import and export. DXF/DWG: Best Practices Learn best practices for DXF/DWG import and export. DXF/DWG: FAQ Get answers to Frequently Asked Questions about DXF/DWG import and export. DXF/DWG: VBScript Macros Learn about DXF/DWG import and export macros. CGM: Insertion Insert a CGM file into a CATDrawing document. CGM: Export Export the data contained in a CATDrawing document into a CGM file. [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]


DXF/DWG: FAQ

DXF/DWG: FAQ Import ● ●

Question: How are Real dimensions dealt with? Answer: The semantic import option manages all kind of dimensions except: ordinate dimensions,

❍ ❍

● ●

rotated dimensions with a fixed angles other than horizontal or vertical.

Question: There is some inconsistency between graphic and semantic import: Answer:There may be an inconsistency between the results of dimensions imported with the semantic preserving option and with the graphic preserving option. This is generally due to an inconsistency in the DXF/DWG file itself (the aspect is different in AutoCAD14 and AutoCAD2000). This happens with files that have not been generated with AutoCAD. Usually, the graphic mode should be used, but only the author of the file can confirm it.

●

Question: The R of a radius dimension is a conglomerate of a P with a small \:

●

Answer:The DXF model is probably the result of a graphic export. In this case, texts are no real texts but geometry.

●

Question: There is a problem of alignment of DIMtext to DIMline:

●

Answer:This occurs while opening a DXF file created with ANSI standard using an ISO standard (or vice-versa).

●

●

Since V5R8-SP2, the current Standard of creation of a New Drawing is taken into account when opening a DXF file with semantic dimensions. So it is possible to by-pass this problem. Since V5R9, texts of dimensions without overloaded text and without tolerance are imported directly as DIMtext instead of texts with positional link, avoiding thus the problem of positioning.

By-pass: 1. Create a New Drawing (menu File/New...). A dialod box appears to choose the standard. If the proposed standard is the one you required, cancel the command: the current standard is already set to the proper value. 2. Otherwise, if you require another standard, select it and click OK. A new drawing is created with this standard. Close this Drawing: the new current standard is memorized. 3. Then open a DXF/DWG file: the current standard will be taken into account.

● ●

Question: Hatches: The result of import is a geometry instead of a filled area: Answer:The original DXF/DWG file does not contain real hatches but geometry (or old R12 hatches, i.e. blocks). Real hatches are mapped automatically.

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/itfug_C2/itfugat0303.htm (1 of 2)10/20/2004 5:08:15 PM

DXF/DWG: FAQ

● ●

Question: Fonts: Problems with è, é, à ... characters: Answer: Use the settings to map AutoCAD and the fonts you use.

❍

●

True Type fonts on NT provide the same fonts in your system and AutoCAD.

●

Question: Fonts:Texts are larger than their frame:

●

Answer: a scale factor is available in the font mapping.

●

Question: The entities visible are not those expected:

●

Answer:

●

All DXF/DWG invisible layers are gathered in a CATIA V5 filter named Invisible Imported Layers.

●

All DXF/DWG visible layers are gathered in a CATIA V5 filter named Visible Imported Layers. If the expected entities are not visible, activate the Visible Imported Layers filter, or if too many entities are visible, activate the Invisible Imported Layers filter.

Export None


http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/itfug_C2/itfugat0303.htm (2 of 2)10/20/2004 5:08:15 PM

CGM: Insertion

Inserting a CGM file into a CATDrawing This task will show you how to insert a cgm file into a CATDrawing document. Open your session. Open your CATDrawing document 1. Select the Tools-> Import External Format item. The Import dialog box is displayed: 2. Select the .cgm extension from the field called Files of type.

3. Click the CGM file of your choice. 4. Click Open.

If you use the command File -> Open (you must select the .cgm extension from the field called Files of type), you only browse the CGM files.

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/itfug_C2/itfugbt0401.htm (1 of 2)10/20/2004 5:08:28 PM

CGM: Insertion

[ Up ] [ Next ]

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/itfug_C2/itfugbt0401.htm (2 of 2)10/20/2004 5:08:28 PM

Sheets

Sheets The Generative Drafting workbench provides a simple method for managing a sheet. A sheet contains: ● a main view: a view which supports the geometry directly created in the sheet ●

a background view: a view dedicated to frames and title blocks

●

interactive or generated views

Define a Drafting Sheet Define the sheet using commands and dialog boxes. Modify a Drafting Sheet Modify the sheet orientation using the Page Setup dialog box. Create a Frame Title Block Create a background sheet and insert a frame and a title block into it using the Frame and Title Block dialog box. Insert an Image into a Frame Title Block Insert a .gif image into a title block. Manage a Background View Add to a sheet the background view (title block plus elements) from another drawing.



Defining a Sheet

Defining a Sheet This task will show you how to define the sheet for a new CATDrawing document and, if needed, add more sheets.

Before you begin, de-activate the Grid icon

1. Click the New icon


from the Standard toolbar or select File -> New... from

the menu bar.

2. Select the Drawing workbench, and click OK.

3. From the New Drawing dialog box, select the ISO standard, and the A0 ISO format. 4. Select the Landscape orientation. 5. Select the 1:1 scale, and then click OK.


Defining a Sheet

●

●

●

The sheet scale is a scaling factor which applies to all views in a given sheet. It does not determine the position of the views (or any other object) contained in the sheet. When the grid is displayed, the position of the view in the sheet is not determined by the grid, which only deals with what is drawn directly in the sheet. To see the real position of a given view in a sheet, you need to use the ruler. It is the only way to see the real coordinates in a sheet referential. The sheet size depends on the standard type. For example, if you choose the ISO standard, the sheet will automatically be assigned the A0 format. You can choose another format if you want. At any time, you can change the standard (which you can update), sheet format, orientation and/or scale. To do this, select File->Page Setup from the menu bar. If you select a new standard, the value in the Apply on field becomes All sheets and the new standard is applied to all drawing sheets annotations.


Defining a Sheet

Adding a new sheet You can add new sheets at any time. These new sheets will be assigned the same standard, format and orientation as the sheet first created and defined using the New Drawing dialog (default setting). Even though you then delete sheet1, the sheets newly created will keep the same name. In other words, even if sheet1 has been deleted, sheet2 will remain named sheet2. 1. Click the New Sheet icon

from the Drawing toolbar.

The new sheet automatically appears as follows:


Defining a Sheet

● ●

If you do not want to have the specification tree displayed, press the F3 key. Once you have created more than one sheet, you can activate one of the sheets by selecting it from the dialog window or from the specification tree.

[ Up ] [ Next ]


Modifying a Sheet

Modifying a Sheet This task will show you how to modify the standard, format, orientation and/or scale of a sheet. Doing this amounts to modifying the options you selected in the New Drawing dialog box when defining the sheet.



Create a sheet using the ISO standard, the A0 ISO format, and the Landscape orientation in the New Drawing dialog box.

1. Select File -> Page Setup from the menu bar.

2. From the Page Setup dialog box, select the ANSI standard, and the A ANSI format. You can update the current standards by clicking the Update button. This copies the most recent version of the standard file in the drawing, thus reflecting the latest changes an administrator may have performed in the standard file.

3. Select the Portrait orientation, and then click OK.

Note that at this step, you can also insert a background view into the sheet you are currently modifying. If you click the Insert Background View... button, the Insert Elements into a Sheet dialog box appears.


Modifying a Sheet

The Page Setup dialog box also let you modify the sheet format and set it to the printer format. For more information, refer to Printing a Document.



Creating a Frame and Title Block

Creating a Frame and Title Block This task shows you how to create a background sheet and insert a frame and a title block into it.

Open the GenDrafting_part.CATDrawing document. De-activate the Grid icon from the Tools toolbar (bottom right).

1. Select Edit -> Background from the menu bar. 2. Click the Frame Creation icon


OR 2. Select the Insert -> Drawing -> Frame and Title Block items from the menu bar. The Insert Frame and Title Block dialog box is displayed:



3. Enter the desired options from the Insert Frame and Title Block dialog box. The frame and title block result as shown below:

When the Frame Creation icon

is activated you cannot edit the views. Use Edit -

> Working Views when you need to work on views.



If you want the frame and title block to appear in the newly created sheets when adding sheets, go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Layout tab. Check the Copy background view option and the First sheet option. This will insert the frame and title block from the sheet you previously created on the current drawing.



Inserting an Image Into a Frame and Title Block

Inserting an Image Into a Frame and Title Block This task will show you how to insert a .gif image into a frame and title block.

Open the GenDrafting_part_titleblock_insert.CATDrawing document. Make sure you are in the background view (go to Edit -> Background from the menu bar).

1. Select the Insert->Object items from the menu bar. 2. The Insert Object dialog box appears. You can either create a new object or re-use an existing file. 3. Activate the Create from File option from the Insert Object dialog box.

4. Select the required .gif image from the Insert Object dialog box. 5. If needed, modify the position of the newly inserted object by dragging it with the cursor. Remember that you can modify the position as long as you remain in the background view. http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/draug_C2/draugbt0303.htm (1 of 2)10/20/2004 5:09:10 PM

Inserting an Image Into a Frame and Title Block

This is what you get:

To create front views, go to Edit->Working views menu bar before clicking the Front View icon.

If you want the frame and title block to appear in the newly created sheets when adding sheets, go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Layout tab. Check the Copy background view option and the First sheet option. This will insert the frame and title block from the sheet you previously created on the current drawing.

If you have a viewer installed with the gif type associated to the viewer, you will not visualize the inserted image properly (an icon appears instead). If so, click on the displayed icon to get the image.



Managing a Background View

Managing a Background View This task will show you how to add to a sheet the background view (title block plus elements) from the sheet of another drawing.


from the Tools toolbar (bottom

right).

1. Select the Tools -> Options command to display the Options dialog box. 2. Click Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Layout tab, and check the Copy background view and Other drawing options.

●

●

●

If you un-check Copy background view, only the sheet properties will be copied from one sheet to another. If you check the First sheet and the Copy background view options, the background view of the first sheet will become the reference. If you check the Other drawing and the Copy background view options, the background view of the sheet you will select later will become the reference.

3. Click OK in the Options dialog box.



4. Click the New Sheet icon


The Insert Elements into a Sheet dialog box appears. 5.

Click the Browse button in the Insert Elements into a Sheet dialog box. The File Selection dialog box appears.

6. Browse to select the drawing which you will use the background view from. In this particular case, select the GenDrafting_part_frame_titleblock. CatDrawing document. 7. Activate the Show Preview option in order to preview the selected CATDrawing document.



8. Click Open in the File Selection dialog box.

The preview of the frame and title block of the selected CATDrawing is now displayed in the Insert Elements into a Sheet dialog box.



At any time you can decide that you do not want the preview to appear. For this, de-activate the Preview On or Off button

.

9. Click the Insert button. The title block now appears on a new sheet named Sheet 2.



Each time you need to insert a new sheet with a given frame and title block, go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Layout tab, and check the Copy background view option and the Other drawing option.

[ Back ] [ Up ]


View Creation

View Creation The Generative Drafting workbench provides a simple method to create views on a predefined sheet.

In this chapter, most of the tasks illustrate how to create views from parts. These views can also be created from assemblies (exploded or not). We voluntarily decided to illustrate these views only created from assemblies whenever specific points needed to be mentioned.

Before you Begin You should be familiar with important concepts. Create a front view Use a reference plane on the 3D part to create a front view. If needed, use the manipulator to assign the right position to the view. Create an advanced front view Create advanced front views to configure such elements as the view name, view scale, etc. Whenever possible, a pertinent projection plane is automatically offered. Create projection views Use the green frame to automatically generate the projection views as desired. Create an unfolded view Create an unfolded view from a Sheet Metal part. Create a view from 3D Generate a view and the associated annotations from the 3D. Create an auxiliary view Define a plane that will be used to generate the auxiliary view. Create an offset section view Use a cutting profile to define and position the offset section view.


View Creation

Create an offset section cut Use a cutting profile to define and position the offset section cut. Create a section view (Planar Surface) Use a cutting profile to define and position the offset section view. Create a section cut (Planar Surface) Use a cutting profile to define and position the offset section view. Create an aligned section view Use a cutting profile to define and position the aligned section view. Create an aligned section cut Use a cutting profile to define and position the aligned section cut. Create a section view with profile defined in 3D Create a section view using a 3D profile as cutting plane. Create a section cut with profile defined in 3D Create a section cut using a 3D profile as cutting plane. Create a detail view Use a callout to create a detail view via a boolean operator from the 3D. Create a detail view profile Use a polygon to create a detail view via a boolean operator from the 3D. Create a quick detail view Use a callout to create a detail view by computing the view directly from 2D projection. Create a quick detail view profile Use a polygon to create a detail view by computing the view directly from 2D projection. Create a clipping view Create a clipping view with a circle as callout.


View Creation

Create a clipping view profile Create a clipping view with a sketched profile as callout. Create an isometric view Create an isometric view using a 3D part. Generate an exploded view Create an isometric view, and then, projected views from an assembly previously exploded via Digital Mock-up workbench (DMU Navigator). Create a broken view Create a broken view from an active and up to date generative view using two profiles corresponding to the part to be broken from the view extremities. Create a breakout view Remove locally material from a left generated view, in order to visualize the remaining visible internal part. Create views via the wizard Create views using a wizard by defining options in the Pre-Defined Configurations dialog box. Create views via the wizard Automatically create front, bottom and right views using a wizard. Create views via the wizard Automatically create front, left and top views using a wizard. Create views via the wizard Automatically create all the views using a wizard. [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]


Before You Begin

Before You Begin Before you start creating views, this section provides you with information on the following topics: ● What is the active view? ●

Defining the design mode

●

Defining the view orientation

●

Callout representation

●

Generated geometry/dress-up settings

●

Generated geometry/dress-up properties

●

Constraints

●

2D/3D associativity

●

3D elements generated in views

What is the Active View? The active view is the view from which other views will be generated. This is also the view in which all the modifications will be performed. For instance, all the 2D geometry and dress-up elements that will be added to the draft views to be created. Open the GenDrafting_part. CATDrawing document.

The active view is framed in red. Non-active views are framed in blue. When you create a view, until you click at the desired view location, the view to be created is framed in green. If you click this view, it becomes the active view and is framed in red.


Before You Begin

Note that the active view is also underlined in the tree structure.

To activate a view: 1. Double-click the frame of the view. OR 1. Right-click the view that you want to activate. The contextual menu appears. 2. Select Activate View from the displayed contextual menu. Axes are taken into account on active views. As a result, the frame of an active view will adapt to the elements included in this view.

Defining the Design Mode In the Product Structure workbench, you can specify that you work either in Visualization mode (Edit -> Representation -> Visualization Mode) or in Design mode (Edit -> Representation -> Design Mode). Accordingly, in the Drafting workbench, the generated views will be either selectable and modifiable or not.


Before You Begin

Defining the View Orientation You can redefine the reference plane orientation of a view to be created using the available blue arrows. This is the case when generating a front view, an isometric view or when generating views using the wizard.

Open the GenDrafting_part.CATPart document and start creating a front view.

1. Start creating the view. 2. Click the right or left arrow to visualize the right or left side, respectively.

3. Click the bottom arrow to visualize the bottom side.

4. Click the counterclockwise arrow to rotate the reference plane.


Before You Begin

5. Drag the green knob to redefine the rotating angle. The default increment value is 30 degrees.

6. You can modify the increment value using the green knob contextual menu. To do this, right-click on the knob and select the desired option from the contextual menu.

● ●

●

Free hand rotation: Rotation is not snapped to a given increment but totally free. Incremental hand rotation: This is the default value: the rotation is snapped to a given increment (from 30 to 30 degrees, between zero and 300). Set increment...: The Increment Setting dialog box is displayed. Enter the Increment value you need. For example 5 deg (5 degrees).


Before You Begin ●

Set current angle to: If you select the Set angle value... option, the Angle Setting dialog box appears.

Enter the current angle (deg) you need. For example, 30.

Callout Representation You can choose the callout elements size not to be dependent on the view scale. You have two ways of doing this: ● After callout creation, right-click on the callout, select Properties in the contextual menu and check Size not dependant on view scale in the callout:


Before You Begin

or ●

Before callout creation, in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting > Layout tab, check the Size not dependant on view scale option:


Before You Begin

Generated Geometry/Dress Up Settings You can generate a number of geometry or dress-up elements, depending on the options you select in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> View tab. For example, if you want the colors of a part to be automatically generated onto the views, check the Inherit 3D colors option. If the color of the part is white and the Inherit 3D colors option checked, the generated views will be white and you may not be able to visualize them properly.

● ●

Note that threads are generated on the condition they are defined on 3D holes. To project sketches, you need to select the Project 3D wireframe option. However, note that a sketch cannot be projected if it is currently being edited in the Sketcher workbench. To project sketches, you need to exit the Sketcher workbench before launching the view creation.

Generated Geometry/Dress-Up Properties Some geometry and dress-up is possibly generated (provided you check the desired options from the Properties dialog box. To display it, choose Properties from the contextual menu and select the View tab): The graphical properties of generated geometry are kept after you update views. This is also true if you delete one or more elements.


Before You Begin

Constraints Constraints detected when views are generated from the 3D do not appear on the drawing.

2D/3D Associativity ... On Views A generative view results from specifications in a 3D document. This specification corresponds either to the whole document or to a feature in the document. This feature can be: 1. a .model document 2. a part document (the whole document or still one or more bodies) 3. a product document (the whole document or still one or more assemblies) Any modification applied to the specifications, before the generated view(s) is/are updated, is detected. You can perform an update. You can update all views or a selection of views: ●

The Update icon

is active in the Update toolbar when a sheet (or drawing)

contains views that need to be updated (this can be all views in the sheet or some of them only). You can update all views in the active sheet by clicking this icon. ●

An update symbol appears in the specification tree for the views that need to be updated. You can update a selection of views by selecting and right-clicking the view from the (s) you want to update and choosing Update Selection contextual menu. Only the items you select are updated. Update symbols remain in


Before You Begin

the specification tree for the items that have not been updated, so you always know which items are up-to-date and which are not. ●

Update symbols also appear in the specification tree to indicate drawings

and

containing views that need to be updated. You can update all views in a sheets given sheet (or in a selection of sheets), by selecting and right-clicking the sheet(s) and then choosing Update Selection. You can also use the same method for a drawing: this will update all sheets (and therefore all views) in the drawing. ●

During an update process, a dialog box is displayed to show the progress of the update. When the update involves several views, a Cancel button is available in this dialog box. This allows you to interrupt the update. The view that is being processed at the time you click this button will be updated (i.e. the update of the current view will finish), and then the update will stop. The subsequent views will not be updated.

... And View Positioning Generative views are positioned according to the center of gravity of the 3D part. If you modify a 3D part in such a way that the center of gravity of the part changes, then, when updating the view, the position of the view will be re-computed according to the new center of gravity of the part and will be modified accordingly.

... After Updating Use the following commands to update views: ●

Click the Update icon

to update all views in a sheet.

●

Select and right-click the views you want to update and choose Update Selection from the contextual menu to update a selection of views.

●

Type C:Force Update to update the drawing in accordance with the 3D. Be careful when doing this, as you may loose manual modifications applied to the drawing.

Updating views means: 1. re-computing associative section/auxiliary view profiles. 2. re-generating the geometry. 3. re-computing any annotation/dimension/dress up element linked to the generated geometry. http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/draug_C2/drauggs02.htm (9 of 13)10/20/2004 5:10:20 PM

Before You Begin

4. taking into account deleted views (one or more) or views that are graphically modified on the condition the view is up-to-date when you delete or modify it. ●

●

Note that you can restore deleted elements at any time by selecting the Restore Deleted option from the contextual menu and then updating the view. You can either use the Update icon if you modified the 3D part, or key in C:Force Update if you did not modify the 3D part. If you delete a generated item and subsequently perform an update, all items that have the same 3D origin as the deleted item will not be generated. Likewise, if you transfer a generated item to No Show and subsequently perform an update, all items that have the same 3D origin as the item in No Show will be transferred to No Show.

... On Generated Dimensions Generated dimensions are associative with the 3D part constraints on the condition you checked the Generation dimensions when updating the sheet option from the Options dialog box (Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Generation tab).

Note that these dimensions will be re-generated in accordance with the other options checked/un-checked in the Options dialog box.


Before You Begin

... On Color When you refresh a generated view you have modified, the colors are re-generated with the part geometrical information and you might obtain unexpected results. As an example, if a user creates this part:

and modify one of the following generated view elements, in this example the line "a" color :

then when refreshing the generated view, lines a and b will be red:


Before You Begin

The reason is that the view is refreshed with the part information and a and b lines are considered as the intersection of two planes and not as two different elements of the generative view.

...On Show / No Show When a Part Body is swapped to visible or invisible space, the corresponding generated views are updateable (Update function button activated).

3D Elements Generated in Views 3D elements are handled differently depending on their type and on the type of view you are generating.

Section cuts, section views, and breakout views All CATPart elements, as well as Exact Solid and Skin elements from .model documents are supported in exact mode.

Projections, quick detail views, clipping views and broken views Exact mode ● All CATPart elements are supported. ●

Exact Solid and Skin elements from .model documents are supported.

CGR and raster mode ● All CATPart elements except wireframe and 3D points are supported. ●

All elements from .model documents are supported.


Before You Begin ●

External MultiCAD components are supported.

[ Up ] [ Next ]



Creating a Front View This task will show you how to create a front view either from a part or from the subpart of a product. You will use a reference plane. You will also learn how to create a front view with local axis system, and how to create a front view from specific subbodies/sub-products.

A front view is a projection view obtained by drawing perpendiculars from all points on the edges of the part to the plane of projection. The plane of projection upon which the front view is projected is called the frontal plane.

Creating a front view Open the GenDrafting_part.CATPart document. Define a new drawing sheet. 1. Click the Front View icon

from the Views toolbar.

2. Select one plane of the 3D part or a plane surface, to define the reference plane. Blue arrows appear.

If you select a plane surface, the reference orientation will be the external normal of the planar surface.



To define the reference plane, you can also select: ● Two edges: these edges correspond to both axes defining the reference plane according to which the front view will be generated. The first edge determines the horizontal axis. ●

A point and an edge, or three points: you will thus define a plane.

In other words, you will select, in the geometry, one of the followings: ● a plane ●

a point and then an edge

●

an edge and then a point

●

two edges

●

two points and then an edge

●

three points

Note that you can redefine the projection plane using the arrows at any time before the view generation. 3. Click inside the sheet to generate the view.

Right-click the frame of the view, select the Properties option from the contextual menu, Generation tab and check the required options in the Properties dialog box. By default, the axis and center lines are generated. You can also view hidden lines, threads, fillets, project 3D points, etc.

You can insert Bill of Material information into the active view.



In a Product Structure context, if you create a front view from a scene of a product, you can directly select the Scene object in the specification tree. You do not necessarily need to select the Product and sub-products any more.

Creating a front view with a local axis system This functionality allows you to take into account a local axis system when creating a view. That way, the origin of the generated view is the projection of the origin of the local axis system selected in the view plane.

Open the Axisprojection.CATPart document. Define a new drawing sheet. 1. Select the drawing to activate it and click the Front View icon toolbar.


from the Views


2. In the Part tree, select the local axis system.

3. Select one plane of the 3D part or a plane surface, to define the reference plane.



4. Click in the drawing to end the view creation. The part local axis system appears in the view.



When creating views with a local axis system, only the origin of the axis system is taken into account and respected in the generated view. The orientation is not taken into account.

Create a front view from specific sub-bodies/subproducts You can multi-select specific sub-products in a product and/or several sub-bodies in a part to create front views displaying the selected elements only. These multiselected 3D elements will be previewed and then used as reference planes for generating several front views. Open the Product_Balloon.CATProduct document. Double-click Scene1 at the down left of the screen. 1. Click the Front View icon


2. Select one body or press the Ctrl key and then multi-select the desired elements in the specification tree.





3. In the 3D, point to the geometry to choose a projection plane. As you go over the geometry with the cursor, the oriented preview automatically appears on the 3D document.



Be careful: once you multi-select bodies or sub-products, and go further into the procedure, you cannot select or de-select any more bodies or sub-products. ●

●

●

As you highlight a 3D element (going over it with the cursor), you can preview and then select the plane corresponding to this highlighted element. As you highlight and select one or more elements defining the final plane, you can preview and assign a given orientation to this final plane. Once you defined the plane, you can preview the front view within the 3D document.

Note that once an element is selected, this element becomes gray colored. In addition, you can only work in one 3D document. If you try selecting another document, you automatically leave the Front View command.



4. When the oriented preview corresponds to the projection plane you want, click on the plane to validate. The front view is previewed. At this point, you can still modify its orientation:

5. Click on the drawing to generate the view.



Creating a front view using selection sets You can also use selection sets to select the sub-bodies and/or sub-products from which you want to generate the front view. Selection sets let you gain in productivity, particularly in the case of large assemblies, when generating several views with numerous common features: you can select and store these features once and reuse the selection set as often as necessary without having to select the features again.

Open the Product_Balloon.CATProduct document.



1. Before you start creating views from selection sets, you first need to create one or more selection sets for this product. For more information, refer to Storing Selections Using Selection in the Infrastructure User's Guide. For example, create a selection set to store the product screws. 2. Click the Front View icon


3. Activate the CATProduct document and select Edit -> Selection Sets... 4. In the Selection Sets Selection dialog box that is displayed, select a selection set and click the Select button. The selection set items are highlighted in the 3D and in the specification tree. For more information, refer to Selecting Selection Sets in the Infrastructure User's Guide.

Once you have selected a selection set, you can use the Ctrl key to select additional sub-bodies or sub-products.

5. In the 3D, point to the geometry to choose a projection plane. As you go over the geometry with the cursor, the oriented preview automatically appears on the 3D document.



6. When the oriented preview corresponds to the projection plane you want, click on the plane to validate. The front view is previewed. At this point, you can still modify its orientation:

7. Click on the drawing to generate the view.



●

●

You can also use selection sets when creating isometric views and advanced front views. Views created from selection sets are not associative with the selection sets themselves: if you modify a selection set after having created a view from it, you have to create the view over again in order for your modifications to be taken into account.



Creating an Advanced Front View

Creating an Advanced Front View This task will show you how to create an advanced front view. Creating advanced front views lets you configure such elements as the view name, view scale, etc. Whenever possible, a pertinent projection plane is automatically offered. For more information on front views in general, refer to Creating Front Views.

Open the Pinmounting.CATPart document. Define a new drawing sheet. Activate the drawing by selecting the drawing window.

1. Click the Advanced Front View

icon. A dialog box appears:



2. Name the view in the associated field:

3. Modify the scale value in 1:2

4. Click OK to validate your settings. 5. Select one plane of the 3D part or a plane surface, to define the reference plane. Blue arrows appear, you can still choose a plane and an orientation before view generation. 6. Click inside the sheet to generate the view.



The DMU Space Analysis workbench lets you create section boxes in 3D. When generating advanced views from the DMU Space Analysis workbench, you can select this section box to generate a view displaying only the box content. For more information on section boxes, refer to Creating Section Boxes in the DMU Space Analysis User's Guide.

You can use selection sets to generate isometric views displaying a selection of elements only. Selection sets let you select the sub-bodies and/or sub-products from which the view will be generated. Refer to Creating a front view using selection sets for more information.




Creating a Projection View This task will show you how to create projection views on the sheet, relatively to the front view previously generated. Projection views are views conceived to be drawn or projected onto planes known as planes of projection. A transparent plane or pane of glass representing a plane of projection is located parallel to the front surfaces of the part.

Open the GenDrafting_front_view.CATDrawing document.

1. Click the Drawing window, and double-click the Projection View icon

from the

Views toolbar (Projections sub-toolbar).

As you move the cursor, a previewed projection view in a green frame appears on the sheet. 2. Define the projection view position by positioning the cursor at the desired view location, for example the right view position. 3. Click inside the green frame to generate the view.



Note that the left view above was created and therefore positioned according to the first projection method. Projection methods are described in Creating Views via the Wizard. 4. Define the bottom view position. 5. Click inside the sheet to generate the view.

6. Click on the Projection view icon to end the projection view creation.





Creating an Unfolded View

Creating an Unfolded View This task shows how to create an unfolded view from a Sheet Metal part. In other words, you will extract drawings from the Sheet Metal workbench (refer to Sheet Metal Design User's Guide). An unfolded view is a projected view that is created from a Sheet Metal part in order to include in a section certain angled elements. As a result, the cutting plane may be bent so as to pass through those features.

The Unfolded View command is active in the Generative Drafting workbench with version 5 Sheet Metal Design license.

Open the GenDrafting_sheet_metal.CATPart document. Tile the windows horizontally to see both your drawing sheet and your Sheet Metal part at the same time.

1. From the Drafting workbench, click the Unfolded View icon

from the Views

toolbar (Projections sub-toolbar).

2. Select a surface on the part. This will automatically use the sheet metal reference wall plane. If you prefer to specify which plane should be used, select the plane in the Sheet Metal specification tree. 3. Click on the sheet.



The unfolded view is displayed. It shows the axis lines resulting from bend axes, as well as bend limits. These axis lines and bend limits are represented as dashed lines. With Sheet Metal parts containing holes, the hole axes (center line) are also represented on the view.

The unfolded view looks like this:



4. Select one of the axis lines. Manipulators appear, allowing you to modify this line.



Creating a View from 3D

Creating a View from 3D This task shows how to generate views and the associated annotations from the 3D (Functional Tolerancing and Annotation workbench). A view from 3D is extracted from a 3D part, product or process that is assigned 3D tolerance specifications and annotations. The master document is the 3D part, product or process, which means that everything is handled at the 3D level: view definition (projection view, section view, section cut), annotation content and graphism. For this reason, it is recommended to perform modifications directly in 3D. You can generate the following types of view from 3D: ● projection views, section views, section cuts ●

aligned section views, aligned section cuts, offset section views, offset section cuts

Creating projection views, section views, section cuts Open the 3DViews.CATPart document. Tile the screen horizontally by selecting Window -> Tile Horizontally from the menu bar. In addition, make sure that the parent standard used in the CATDrawing document and in the CATPart (annotations) is the same. Otherwise, both the view and the annotations may not be generated. In our scenario, the parent standard used in the 3DViews.CATPart document is ISO. Therefore, the parent standard used in the CATDrawing document should be ISO.

1. Click the View From 3D icon

from the Views toolbar

(Projections sub-toolbar).

2. Select a view from the 3D, either in the specification tree or on the part. In this case, select Projected View.1 in the specification tree.



The view to be created is previewed (included annotations) on the sheet. You cannot modify the view orientation, but you can modify the view position by dragging it using the right mouse button. 3. Click on the sheet to create the new view.

You can notice that one of the extracted annotations (datum B) bears a red cross mark, which indicates that the leader cannot be extracted linked to the geometry. This is because the 3D annotation leader is linked to 3D geometry which is not visible in the 2D view (i.e. hidden geometry). Such a red cross mark will be used for any annotation or dimension with a leader linked to hidden geometry (i.e. 3D geometry which is not visible in a 2D view). You can either change the properties of the view from 3D (Edit -> Properties) to display hidden lines, or transfer the marked annotations to a 3D view where the associated geometry will be visible when extracted.

4. Repeat the first two steps, this time selecting Projection View.2 as the view to be created.



5. Once again, repeat the first two steps, this time selecting Section Cut View.1. The preview is displayed on the sheet. 6. On the sheet, click Projection View.2 to specify that the callout for the section cut should be positioned in that view. Note that it works the same for section views.

7. Click on the sheet to create the view.



Creating aligned section views/section cuts and offset section views/ section cuts Open the 3DViews_AlignedSectionView.CATPart document. Tile the screen horizontally by selecting Window -> Tile Horizontally from the menu bar. Make sure that the parent standard used in the CATDrawing document and in the CATPart (annotations) is the same. 1. Click the View From 3D icon

from the Views toolbar

(Projections sub-toolbar).

2. Select the aligned section view from the 3D, either in the specification tree or on the part. In this case, select Projected View.1 in the specification tree.

The view to be created is previewed (included annotations) on the sheet. You cannot modify the view orientation, but you can modify the view position by dragging it using the right mouse button. 3. Click on the sheet to create the new view.



More About Views from 3D ●

●

Only the elements visualized in the 3D (i.e. in Show mode) at the time of extraction are extracted in the view from 3D. In other words, any element hidden in the 3D will not appear in the view. If you then show this element in the 3D part, it will be displayed in the view from 3D after you update it. You can move or modify annotations in views from 3D. However, if the part is modified and you subsequently update the view, any modification applied to the annotations in the drawing will be lost. We advise you perform modifications on the 3D part directly.

●

Extracted annotations are not associative to the geometry.

●

2D annotations can be added to views from 3D.

●

● ●

●

●

Views from 3D cannot be rotated. In other words, when you edit the properties of this view (Edit -> Properties), the Angle field is grayed out and cannot be edited. In views from 3D, the horizontal axis of the view is parallel to the horizontal axis of the sheet. You can create views from 3D from a part (Functional Tolerancing and Annotation workbench), a product (Product Functional Tolerancing and Annotation workbench) or a process (Process Tolerancing and Annotation workbench). It is currently impossible to extract views from part, product and process at once. However, you can superpose views as a bypass (using the View Positioning -> Superpose contextual command). Views from 3D are not associative to the geometry of the 3D view. So, if you modify the geometry of a 3D view, the definition of the corresponding 2D view will not be modified at the next update, even if the 3D view is associative to the geometry. The Note Object Attribute (NOA) from a ditto (2D component) is now extracted in views from 3D. However, if a frame is defined in 3D, this frame is not displayed in the 2D view. To work around this, do not use the 3D annotation frame when defining the NOA reference; instead, have your administrator define the frame as part of the 2D component geometry.



Creating an Auxiliary View

Creating an Auxiliary View This task will show you how to create an auxiliary view. Many objects are of such shape that their principal faces cannot always be assumed parallel to the regular planes of projection. Creating an auxiliary view allows showing the true shapes by assuming a direction of sight perpendicular to planes that are perpendicular of the curves. This auxiliary view, together with the top view, completely describes the object.

Open the GenDrafting_part.CATDrawing document. Make sure the right view is active (double-click to activate it).

1.

Click the Auxiliary View icon

from the

Views toolbar (Projections sub-toolbar).

2.

Sketch the representation of the plane. In this case, click an edge on the right view. You could also click a point and then an edge. Both the 3D surface and the sketched plane are associative. The selected edge becomes a line that you can position where desired using the cursor. This line/callout will be automatically used as the plane.



3.

Click to position the callout. The reference plane is automatically positioned according to the selected edge. Positioning the auxiliary view callout amounts to defining the auxiliary view direction.

4.

Click to position the auxiliary view. Before clicking, as you move the cursor within a zone perpendicular to the plane, a preview of the auxiliary view to be created simultaneously appears. This view will be automatically positioned accordingly. This is also true when creating a section view or a section cut. You can also move the cursor outside the zone perpendicular to the plane and position the view where you want. Note that the callout can be inverted or graphically modified.


.


●

You can move the view freely after it has been created, providing you position it independently of its reference view. For this: 1. Right-click the frame of the view you want to move. 2. Select the View Positioning -> Position Independently of Reference View from the displayed contextual menu. 3. Drag the view to the desired location.

●

You can choose the auxiliary view axis orientation. For this go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Layout and check the Auxiliary and/or section views orientation according to profile option.



Creating an Offset Section View / Cut

Creating an Offset Section View / Cut This task will show you how to create an offset section view/cut using a cutting profile as cutting plane. In sectioning through irregular objects, it is often desirable to show several features that do not lie in a straight line by offsetting or bending the cutting plane.

Open the GenDrafting_section_view02.CATDrawing and GenDrafting_section_view.CATDrawing documents. Make sure the front view is active (use double-clicking). Delete the text assigned to the front view (right-click on the text and select Delete option from the contextual menu).

1.

Click the Drawing window, and click the Offset Section View icon

or the Offset Section Cut icon

from the Views toolbar (Sections sub-toolbar).

2.

Select the elements required for sketching the cutting profile: points, edges (linear or circular), center lines, axes. If you are not satisfied with the profile you create, you can, at any time, use Undo

or Redo

icons. Note that SmartPick assists you when creating this profile. The section plane appears on the 3D part and moves dynamically on the part. 3.

Double-click to end the cutting profile creation.

Offset section view Positioning the section view using the cursor amounts to defining the section view direction. The cutting profile is hole associative.



4.

Click to define the section view direction and to position the view on the sheet. The view name and scale appear on the generated view as you checked the View name and Scaling factor options in the Options dialog box. Even when the view is generated, you can edit and modify the section profile. For this double-click this profile and either invert or replace it.



Offset Section Cut Positioning the section cut using the cursor amounts to defining the section cut direction. The cutting profile is hole associative. For the purpose of this scenario, select a circular edge and double-click when you are satisfied with the position of the rotating profile that automatically appears on the 3D view.



4.

Click to define the section cut direction and to position the view on the sheet.

The view name and scale appear on the generated view as you checked the View name and Scaling factor options in the Options dialog box.

●

The frame of the active view adapts to the length of the cutting profile.

●


●

You can assign a line type to the view to be generated. For this, go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> View tab, click the Configure button next to View Linetype and select the desired option from the dialog box.

Pattern The patterns which are used to represent the section are defined in the standards. For more information, refer to Pattern Definition in the Interactive Drafting User's Guide. You may modify the pattern (hatching, dotting, coloring or motif) by right-clicking the pattern and selecting Properties from the contextual menu. This will display the Properties dialog box in which you may either select a new pattern or modify some graphical attributes of the existing pattern. For more information, refer to Modifying a Pattern. Patterns will not be applied to offset sections which are tangent to 3D faces.

Apply uncut specification In an assembly, you can define that given parts will or will not be sectioned when generated into section views or breakout views. In the Assembly Design workbench, select one part, then the Edit -> Properties command from the menu bar from and either activate or de-activate the Not cut in section views options.

In the Drafting workbench, modify the view properties (Edit-> Properties or Tools->Options) to define that the resulting views will or will not be sectioned.





Creating a Section View / Cut (Planar Surface)

Creating a Section View / Cut (Planar Surface) This task will show you how to create a section view / section cut using a planar surface or a wireframe plane in the 3D. A section view / section cut is a view that allows sectioning through irregular objects, and thereby allows showing several features that do not lie in a straight line by offsetting or bending the cutting plane.

Open the GenDrafting_part.CATPart and the GenDrafting_front_view.CATDrawing documents. Make sure the front view is active on the drawing (double-click to activate it). Tile your windows vertically to see both your part and the related drawing.

1. Click the Drawing window, and click the Offset Section View icon

or the Offset

from the Views toolbar Section Cut icon (Sections sub-toolbar).

2. Select a planar surface on the 3D part. This planar surface need to be perpendicular to the projection plane of the active view. The section plane appears on the 3D part and moves dynamically on the part. The cutting profile is automatically displayed on the front view as well as a preview of the view to be generated.


Creating a Section View / Cut (Planar Surface)

3. Click to generate the view.

●

●

The patterns which are used to represent the section are defined in the standards. For more information, refer to Pattern Definition in the Interactive Drafting User's Guide. You may modify the pattern (hatching, dotting, coloring or motif) by right-clicking the pattern and selecting Properties from the contextual menu. This will display the Properties dialog box in which you may either select a new pattern or modify some graphical attributes of the existing pattern. For more information, refer to Modifying a Pattern.



Creating an Aligned Section View / Cut

Creating an Aligned Section View / Cut This task will show you how to create an aligned section view and/or aligned section cut using a cutting profile as cutting plane. An aligned section view / cut is a view created from a cutting profile defined from non parallel planes. In order to include in a section certain angled elements, the cutting plane may be bent so as to pass through those features. The plane and feature are then imagined to be revolved into the original plane.

Open the GenDrafting_aligned_view02.CATDrawing document.

1. Click the Drawing window, and click the Aligned Section Cut . If desired, you can also click the Aligned Section View icon from the Views toolbar (Sections subtoolbar).

2. Select the elements required for sketching the cutting profile: points, edges (linear or circular), center lines, the axis. If you are not satisfied with the profile you create, you can, at any time, use Undo or Redo icons. Note that SmartPick assists you when creating this profile.



The section plane also appears on the 3D part and moves dynamically on the part.

3. Double-click to end the cutting profile creation.

Positioning the section view amounts to defining the section cut direction. The cutting profile is hole associative.




The patterns which are used to represent the section are defined in the standards. For more information, refer to Pattern Definition in the Interactive Drafting User's Guide. You may modify the pattern (hatching, dotting, coloring or motif) by right-clicking the pattern and selecting Properties from the contextual menu. This will display the Properties dialog box in which you may either select a new pattern or modify some graphical attributes of the existing pattern. For more information, refer to Modifying a Pattern. Patterns will not be applied to aligned sections which are tangent to 3D faces.



Creating a Section View / Cut with Profile Defined in 3D

Creating a Section View / Cut with Profile Defined in 3D In this task, you will learn how to create a section view or a section cut using a 3D profile as cutting plane. Section views / section cuts are usually created using a cutting profile as the cutting plane; such a profile is typically driven using concentricity or parallelism constraints. Defining a profile in 3D to create a section view / section cut enables you to make the profile associative with the geometry, and therefore to drive this profile using dimensional constraints, for example.

Open the GenDrafting_part.CATPart and the GenDrafting_front_view.CATDrawing documents. Tile your windows vertically to see both your part and the related drawing.

1. In the Part window, click the Sketcher icon

and select the xy plane as the

reference plane. You are now in the Sketcher workbench.

2. Click the Profile icon

and

sketch the profile you will use as cutting plane. For the purpose of this exercise, make sure you sketch your profile using orthogonal lines.



3. You can now create dimensional constraints between your profile and other elements. Click the Constraint icon . 4. Now, click a vertical line and the edge of the part to create a dimensional constraint between them.

5. Exit the Sketcher workbench.

6. In the Drawing window, click the Update icon 7. Click the Offset Section View icon

to update the view.

from the Views toolbar (Sections sub-

toolbar).

Depending on the type of profile you sketched and on the type of section (offset or aligned) you want, you can select another icon on the Sections sub-toolbar. If the 3D profile is not valid for generating the appropriate view, you will not be able to select it. In this case, you will need to select another icon.



8. Select the profile on the 3D part. The cutting profile is automatically displayed on the front view as well as a preview of the view to be generated. Positioning the section view amounts to defining the section view or the section cut direction.


●

●

●

You can modify the section view / section cut by editing the 3D profile. After doing so, don't forget to update the drawing. When editing a 3D profile, make sure that you modify it in accordance with the type of section (offset or aligned) you created: if an edited profile is invalid when you update a drawing, the associated section view / section cut will not be displayed (an error symbol will appear instead). If you delete the 3D profile and then update the drawing, the section view / section cut will not be deleted. The profile will no longer be associated with the geometry. You can subsequently edit the profile directly in the drawing by doubleclicking it.



●

●

●

The patterns which are used to represent the section are defined in the standards. For more information, refer to Pattern Definition in the Interactive Drafting User's Guide. You may modify the pattern (hatching, dotting, coloring or motif) by right-clicking the pattern and selecting Properties from the contextual menu. This will display the Properties dialog box in which you may either select a new pattern or modify some graphical attributes of the existing pattern. For more information, refer to Modifying a Pattern. Patterns will not be applied to aligned sections which are tangent to 3D faces.



Creating a Detail View / Detail View Profile

Creating a Detail View / Detail View Profile This task will show you how to create from the 3D a detail view using either a circle as callout or a sketched profile. Note that the procedure varies slightly depending on the method you choose. A detail view is a partial generated view that shows only what is necessary in the clear description of the object. Note that the Detail view command uses a Boolean operator from the 3D whereas the Quick Detail view command computes the view directly from the 2D projection. The representation is therefore different.

Open the GenDrafting_isometric_view.CATDrawing document.

To create a detail view (this is the method illustrated here): 1. Click the Drawing window, and click the Detail from the Views toolbar (Details subView icon toolbar). 2. Click the callout center. 3. Drag to select the callout radius and click a point to terminate the selection.

OR To create a detail view using a sketched profile: 1. Click the Drawing window, and click the Detail View Profile icon Views toolbar (Details sub-toolbar). 2. Create the points required for sketching a polygon used as profile. 3. Double click to end the cutting profile creation.


from the


● ●

SmartPick assist you when sketching the profile. You do not necessarily need to close the profile: the profile will automatically be closed.

The dress-up elements generated from the 3D are identified and represented in the generated detail view whereas it is not when generating quick detail views. 4. Click to generate the detail view. The default scale is 2 (twice the scale of the active view). You can modify this scale. 5. Right-click the detail view and select the Properties option from the contextual menu, View tab. Enter the desired Parameters Scale, for example 3 and then click OK in this Properties dialog box.



● ●

●

●

●

You can also modify the detail view boundary (Properties dialog box). You can assign a line type to the view to be generated. For this, go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> View tab, click the Configure button next to View Linetype and select the desired option from the dialog box. In the isometric view, you can move the detail text ("A" in this example) after detail view creation. If you create a detail view from a section view and subsequently modify the cutting profile in the section view, in such a way that the detail view is no longer accurate, the detail view cannot be updated so as to take into account the changes in the cutting profile. You can insert Bill of Material information into the active view.



Creating a Quick Detail View / Quick Detail View Profile

Creating a Quick Detail View / Quick Detail View Profile This task will show you how to quickly create a detail view using either a circle as callout or a sketched profile. In this particular case, we create a quick detail view using a sketched profile as we create this detail view from an oblong part. Note that for creating a detail view using a circle, the dialog is exactly the same. A detail view is a partial generated view that shows only what is necessary in the clear description of the object. Note that, the Quick Detail view command computes the view directly from the 2D projection whereas the Detail view command uses a Boolean operator from the 3D. The representation is therefore different.

Open the GenDrafting_isometric_view.CATDrawing document.

1. Click the Drawing window and click the Quick Detail View Profile icon from the Views toolbar (Details sub-toolbar). If you create a detail view using a sketched profile, you will click the Quick Detail View icon

.

2. Select the points required for sketching a polygon. 3. Double click to end the cutting profile creation. Note that you do not necessarily need to close the profile. If so, the profile will automatically be closed.



4. Click to generate the quick detail view. Unlike a detail view

, the boundary is

entirely closed. You can modify this detail view boundary (Properties dialog box).



●

●

●

The default scale is 2 (twice the scale of the active view). You can modify this scale. For this, right-click the detail view and select the Properties option from the contextual menu, View tab. Enter the desired Parameters Scale and then click OK in this Properties dialog box. You can insert Bill of Material information into the active view. You can assign a line type to the view to be generated. For this, go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> View tab, click the Configure button next to View Linetype and select the desired option from the dialog box.



Creating a Clipping View / Clipping View Profile

Creating a Clipping View and/or a Clipping View Profile This task will show you how to create a clipping view using a circle as callout. You can also use a roughly sketched profile. A clipping view is a partial view that shows only what is necessary in the clear description of the object. This operation is applied directly onto the active view.

Open the GenDrafting_clipping_view.CATDrawing document.

1. Click the Drawing window, and click the Clipping from the Views toolbar (Clippings View icon sub-toolbar). If you create a clipping view using a sketched profile, you will select the Clipping View Profile icon

.

2. Select the center of the circle, or select the required points for sketching a polygon if you are creating a clipping view using a sketched profile.



3. To end the clipping profile creation, release the mouse in the case of a circle, or double-click in the case of a polygon. The clipping view and the associated profile result as shown here:



Note that the generated dimensions that are not in the clipping view and the annotations that are not linked to the generated clipping view anymore are automatically turned into the NoShow mode.

4. Click the Swap visible space icon

from the View toolbar.

You can now visualize the dimensions and annotations that do not appear on the clipping view anymore and, if needed, make them appear again on the clipping view.

You can select the Unclip option from the contextual menu. However, selecting this option will not make the dimensions re-appear on the unclipped view.



5. Click the Hide/Show icon


6. Select the dimension you want to display on the clipping view.

7. Click the Swap visible space icon


The selected dimension now appears on the clipping view again.

●

●

You can insert Bill of Material information into the active view. Once a clipping has been applied onto a view, it is impossible to create detail views, breakout views and broken views from this view.



Creating an Isometric View

Creating an Isometric View This task will show you how to create an isometric view from a 3D part. Isometric means "equal measure". To produce an isometric projection, it is necessary to place the object so that its principal edges make equal angles with the plane of projection and are therefore foreshortened equally. Note that an isometric view created from a product can be re-used for generating an exploded view.

Open the GenDrafting_part02.CATPart document. Start creating a new drawing (and this case, create an empty sheet). Tile your windows vertically to visualize the 3D part and the sheet at the same time.

In a Product Structure context, if you create a front view from a scene of a product, you can directly select the Scene object in the specification tree. You do not necessarily need to select the Product and sub-products.

1. Click the Drawing window, and click the Isometric View icon toolbar (Projections sub-toolbar).

2. Click the 3D part.


from the Views

Creating an Isometric View

A green frame with the preview of the isometric view to be created, as well as blue manipulators, appear. You can re-define the position of the view to be created using these manipulators: to the bottom, the left, the right, the top, or rotated using a given snapping or according to an edited rotation angle. For more information, refer to Before you begin.

●

●

You can use selection sets to generate isometric views displaying a selection of elements only. Selection sets let you select the sub-bodies and/or sub-products from which the view will be generated. Refer to Creating a front view using selection sets for more information. You can insert Bill of Material information into the active view.



Creating an Exploded View

Creating an Exploded View This task will show you how to create an isometric view, and then, projected views from an assembly previously exploded via Digital Mock-up workbench (DMU Navigator).

Open Gun_Body.CATProduct.

In a Product Structure context, if you create a front view from a scene of a product, you can directly select the Scene object in the specification tree. You do not necessarily need to select the Product and sub-products.

1. Go to the Digital Mock-up workbench (DMU Navigator) and define the Scene with the adequate orientation and with the instances properly positioned.

2. Explode the view as shown here:



3. Go to the Drafting workbench and click the Isometric View icon

from the Views

toolbar (Projections sub-toolbar).

4. Select the product from the specification tree and then a plane on this product. 5. Click to locate the resulting exploded view.



Non exploded product:

Exploded product:




Creating a Broken View

Creating a Broken View This task will show you how create a broken view from an active and up-to-date generated view. You will define two profiles corresponding to the part to be broken from the view extremities. A broken view is a view that allows shortening an elongated object.

Open the GenDrafting_part_Broken_View.CATDrawing document.

1. Click the Broken View icon

from the Views

toolbar. 2. Click a first point corresponding to the first extremity of the first profile. A green dotted profile appears which allows you to position the profile either vertically or horizontally. 3. Click a second point corresponding to the profile second extremity. In this example, click a point so that the profile appears horizontally. OR 3. Drag the cursor over the green horizontal profile that appears as you create a first point and, if needed, click to locate the second point on this first profile.



4. If needed, translate the profile. Red zones appear. These red zones correspond to the zones out of which the view cannot be broken. Note that the orientation of the second profile is the same as the orientation of the first profile. 5. Click a point for defining the position of the second green profile that appears. 6. Click on the sheet. The broken view appears.

You can create new breaks in a broken view, but in the same direction and providing the two breaks do not overlap. To propagate the broken specification during the creation of a projection or auxiliary view, go to Tools -> Options -> Drafting from the menu bar (Layout tab) and activate the Propagation of broken and breakout specifications option.

Propagating a specification means generating a view (B) from another view (A) on which you previously performed an operation, and obtaining a view (B) which includes this operation. For example, (i) you create a broken view (view A) and activate the Propagation of broken and breakout specifications option, you then (ii) generate a projection view (view B). As a result, the projected view (view B) will appear with the broken area. You can only perform a propagation from a broken view if the projection direction is perpendicular to the direction of the broken view.



●

● ●

You can assign a line type to the view to be generated. For this, go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> View tab, click the Configure button next to View Linetype and select the desired option from the dialog box. You can remove created breaks via the contextual menu. It is impossible to create breakout views, offset section views, detail views and clipping views from a broken view.



Creating a Breakout View

Creating a Breakout View This task will show you how to create a breakout view. In other words, you will remove locally material from a generated view in order to visualize the remaining visible internal part. A breakout view is one not in direct projection from the view containing the cutting profile. In other words, it is not positioned in agreement with the standard arrangement of views. A breakout view is often a partial section.

Open the GenDrafting_part.CATDrawing document. For the purpose of this scenario, you will create the breakout on the left view: therefore, make sure the left view is active by doubleclicking it.

1.

Click the Drawing window, and click the Breakout View icon from the Views toolbar (Break View sub-toolbar).

2.

Click the first point of the breakout profile.

3.

Click as many points as desired for creating the profile.

4.

If needed, double-click to end the profile creation and close this profile automatically. OR

4.

Click on the profile first point to close and end the profile creation.



The 3D Viewer window appears, displaying the 3D part corresponding to the generated view. A green arrow indicates in which direction the breakout will be created. This window lets you position the 3D part according to a view you go over (on the drawing), provided the Animate option is checked. This window also lets you visualize a view plane and use it to define the depth of the breakout. You can move this plane using one of these methods: ●

●

●

directly in the 3D Viewer window, drag the plane to the desired location. This method does not let you define the depth of the breakout precisely. The breakout will not be associative with any element. in the drawing, place the cursor over an axis, a center line or an edge (circular or linear) of a perpendicular view. The plane will be moved accordingly. This method lets you break the view through a hole or a face, for example. The breakout will be associative with the selected element. in the drawing, select the edge which corresponds to the face that you will use as a reference element to define the depth of the breakout, and enter the depth in the appropriate 3D Viewer field. This method lets you define the depth of the breakout precisely. The breakout will be associative with the selected reference element and with the depth value.

5.

Check the Animate option to visualize the 3D part in accordance with the position of the cursor on a generated view.

6.

In the CATDrawing document, place the cursor over the front view (which is perpendicular to the left view).

7.

In the CATDrawing document, place the cursor over the center line that will be used as an extremity plane, as shown below.



OR 7.

In the 3D Viewer window, click the Reference element field to select it. Then, in the CATDrawing document, select the edge which corresponds to the face that will be used as a reference element, and enter the breakout depth in the Depth (in mm) field (you can also define the depth by moving the red plane with the mouse).



8.

Then, click OK in the 3D Viewer window. The breakout view is created.

You can create a breakout on a view that already contains breakouts.



●

Once created, the breakout view profile cannot be modified.

●

You cannot apply a breakout and a break to the same view.

You can generate the following types of views from a breakout view: ● projection views, ●

auxiliary views,

●

section views

●

section cuts.

Once the breakout view is created, you can right-click the view, and select the Remove Breakout option. You can also right-click the view, select the Apply Breakout To option and click another view you want to apply the breakout to.

To generate views (projection, auxiliary, section and section cut) with this breakout, go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting from the menu bar, click on the Layout tab, and activate the Propagation of broken and breakout specification option.

Propagating a specification means generating a view (B) from another view (A) on which you previously performed an operation and including this operation in the generated view (B). For example, (i) you create a breakout view (view A) and activate the activate the Propagation of broken and breakout specification option, you then (ii) generate a projection view (view B). As a result, the projected view (view B) will display this breakout area.

About line types You can choose the line type you want to assign to the breakout view. To do this, go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> View tab, click the Configure button next to View Linetype and select the desired option from the dialog box.

If you choose the zigzag linetype (linetype #8), note that this linetype is just a graphical dress-up of the view. This means that if one line is relimited on the breakout line, then it will be relimited on the theoretical line as shown here, and not on the visualized zigzag line.

About patterns The patterns which are used to represent the breakout are defined in the standards. For more information, refer to Pattern Definition in the Interactive Drafting User's Guide.



You may modify the pattern (hatching, dotting, coloring or motif) by right-clicking the pattern and selecting Properties from the contextual menu. This will display the Properties dialog box in which you may either select a new pattern or modify some graphical attributes of the existing pattern. For more information, refer to Modifying a Pattern.



Creating Views via the Wizard

Creating Views via the Wizard This task will show you how to create views using a wizard. These views are views that are generated automatically once the CATDrawing document is opened. These views can then be modified as if they had been manually created one after the other.

Open the GenDrafting_part.CATPart document. Start creating a new drawing (and this case, create an empty sheet).

Before you begin, make sure you select the projection mode you need. If you want to change the method you use as you pre-define your configurations, what you need to do is: 1. Right-click the sheet. 2. Select the Properties option from the displayed contextual menu. The Properties dialog box appears with Projection Method options. 3. Check the Create projection view using first angle standard option.

●

●

Create projection views using first angle standard: Orthographic representation comprising the arrangement, around the principal view of an object, of some of all of the other five views of that object. With reference to the principal view, the other views are arranged as follows: - the view from above is placed underneath - the view from below is placed above - the view from the left is placed on the right - the view from the rear is placed on the left or on the right, as convenient. (Ref. No. ISO 10209-2:1993) Create projection views using third angle standard: Orthographic representation comprising the arrangement, around the principal view of an object, of some of all of the other five views of that object. With reference to the principal view, the other views are arranged as follows: - the view from above is placed above - the view from below is placed underneath - the view from the left is placed on the left - the view from the rear is placed on the left or on the right, as convenient. (Ref. No. ISO 10209-2:1993)



1. Click the Drawing window, and click the Wizard from the Views toolbar (Wizard sub-toolbar). icon

2. Select the desired view configuration from the View Wizard (1/2) : Predefined Configurations dialog box.

In this case, ISO standard / First angle projection method is used and the following configurations are available: ●

front, bottom and left

●

front, bottom and right



●

front, top and left

●

front, top and right

●

projection and isometric

●

projection, rear and isometric

If you use the ANSI standard (Third angle projection method), in the dialog box the configuration symbol displayed , as well as the configuration options will be different. To have the projection views linked to the main view click the

option.

You can can define the Minimum distance between each view. For this, enter the desired value in the modifiable field available in the View Wizard dialog box.

A preview is available: ● The main view corresponds to the view which any other view will be linked to. This main view can be either a front or an isometric view. It is squared in the green color. This is the view that will become the active view when you will generate the desired views. Any other view (front and/or isometric view) that can possibly become the main view is squared in the black color. To make a view become the main view, right-click this view and select the Set as main view option from the contextual menu.

●

●

At any time, you can delete one view you inserted. For this, right-click the desired view and select the Delete option from the contextual menu. Once you generate the views, if you move the main view, all the child views will move accordingly. You can right-click one view and select the Position Independently of Reference View option from the contextual menu, if you need to move one child view independently from the reference view.



3. Click the NEXT> button from the View Wizard (1/2) : Predefined Configurations dialog box.

The View Wizard (2/2) : Arranging the Configuration dialog box is now displayed with a new set of view buttons: ●

front view

●

rear view

●

top view

●

bottom view

●

left view

●

right view

●

isometric view

●

clear preview

4. Click the Isometric View button

.



5. Position the isometric view onto the Preview window by dragging and clicking it as desired. 6. Click the FINISH button from the View Wizard (2/2) : Arranging the Configuration dialog box.

7. Select the CATPart document.



8. Click on the desired 3D part plane to be used as reference plane. If the plane can be computed, the Oriented Preview of the 3D part appears as you move the cursor over the 3D part (planes). The views now appear on the CATDrawing document: they are previewed in green frames and can be re-oriented thanks to the blue arrows that appear. 9. Go over the view frames with your cursor to have these views visualized.



10. Use the blue arrows to have the views re-oriented as desired and then go over the views with the cursor, if you need to check the preview of the other views. For more details, see chapter called Before You Begin.





You can also modify the increment value using the green knob contextual menu. For this, right-click on the knob and select the desired option from the contextual menu. For more details, see chapter called Before you begin.

11. Once you are satisfied, click on the sheet to make the views be actually created. The front view is actually the main view and the isometric view is added to the predefined configuration.

The ISO and ANSI standards are independent from the angle projection method.



[ Back ] [ Up ]


View Modification

View Modification The Generative Drafting workbench provides a simple method to modify previously created views.

Before you begin Learn how to edit the properties of multi-selected views. Move a view Drag a view to a new location. Position a view Position Generative or Interactive views either by aligning them, superposing them and setting relative view position. Position a view independently of its reference view Position a view independently of its reference view. Locate reference/resulting views Navigate easily between reference/resulting views in the case of section views, section cuts, auxiliary views or detail views. Isolate generated views Remove associativity between an existing CATPart (or CATProduct or CATModel) and the corresponding generated views. Restore deleted generated elements Restore generated elements that have been deleted from a view. Lock a view Use the contextual menu (Properties option) to lock a view. Scale a view Modify the scale of a view. Rename a view Give a new name to an existing view.


View Modification

Add a generative Bill of Material Insert Bill of Material information into the active view. Generating balloons on a view Generate balloons on the active view. Show geometry in views Visualize geometrical elements in all viewpoints as well as in a 3D viewer corresponding to the views analyzed. Modify a callout graphism Modify the graphical attributes of one or more callout used when generating auxiliary, section or detail views. Modify a callout geometry Modify the geometrical properties of a callout used when creating detail views, section views and section cuts. Modify cut elements in a section view Modify cut/uncut elements in a section view. Modify a pattern Modify the pattern of a view and apply a material to this pattern. Duplicating Generative Geometry Duplicate a generative view sub-element in order to modify a generated view sub-part independently from the part linked to the drawing. [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]


Before you begin

Before you begin Editing Multi-Selected Views (Properties) You can modify the properties of a group of views of different kinds (interactive, generative or detail views), either on a single sheet or on different sheets. These modifications will be applied to the properties values common to the selected views. In other words, when you will edit the properties values of different views, only the properties values of the views with the same parameters will be modifiable. Still, mixed properties values will be modifiable. Mixed properties values meaning values which are not common to the selected views. You can select the views from different sheets.

Open the GenDrafting_part_Move_View02.CATDrawing document.


Before you begin

1. Multi-select views from the specification tree. In this particular case, select all the views. Remember that you can use the Shift or the Ctrl key.


Before you begin

2. Select Edit -> Properties command from the menu bar. The Properties dialog box appears: de-activate the options as shown here: View Frame option unlocked.


Before you begin

The views result as shown here:


Before you begin

3. Multi-select views from the specification tree. In this particular case, select the top, bottom, left and right views. Activate the Properties options as shown here: activate the options as shown here: Hidden Lines option unlocked.


Before you begin

The views result as shown here:


Before you begin

●

If the view name is not common, no View name and no Name Editor With Formula appear by default.

●

If the view scale is not common, no Scale appears by default.

●

In the case of a mixed values, the modifiable fields appear white and empty.

●

If one view is locked and mixed properties values will also be locked.

If you modify one view (view A) and then select another view (view B), click the Apply switch button if you do not want to loose the modifications first applied on the view A.

[ Up ] [ Next ]


Moving a View

Moving a View This task will show you how to move one or more views by dragging them.

Moving One View You can move one view by selecting or more views (implicitly) by dragging the parent view.

Open the GenDrafting_part_Move_View.CATDrawing document.

1. Click the view to be moved. 2. Drag the clicked view to the new location.


Moving a View

3. Release the mouse button when you want to position the view. The view is re-positioned.

Moving More Than One View Explicitly You can move more than one view explicitly (generative and interactive views). These views can be: ● child views that are linked to a single parent view (and constrained to this parent view) ●

child views that are linked to different parent views (be careful: constrained views remain so by default ; not constrained views move in accordance with the position of the cursor)

Open the GenDrafting_part_Move_View02.CATDrawing document.


Moving a View

1. Multi-select the views to be moved. 2. Drag the selected views to the new location.

3. Release the mouse button when you want to position the views. There are different cases: ● You multi-select views that are independent (not linked to a parent view): When you move the views with the cursor, all these views are translated into the same direction. ●

●

You multi-select views that are linked to different parent views which are not selected: When you move the views with the cursor, all these views are translated into a direction that depends on the constraints between the parent and the child views. In other words, two child views may be moved into two new locations which are not synchronized (for example, one according to x, the other according to y). You multi-select views that are linked to different parent views which are also selected: When you move the views with the cursor, all these views are translated into a direction that depends on the constraints between the parent and the child views. As a result, all the child views (with an active link), be they selected or not,are


Moving a View

translated into the same direction as the parent views.



Positioning a View

Positioning a View The purpose of this task is to position Generative or Interactive views: you will learn how to align views, superpose views and set relative view position.

Aligning Views Using Elements You will learn how to align a view with another one using geometrical elements (lines, circles or points). Open the GenDrafting_part_Align_Views.CATDrawing document. Go to Tools -> Option -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> General tab and in the View axis area, unselect Display in the current view. 1. Right-click the view that you want to re-position, the unfolded view for example. A contextual menu is displayed. 2. Select View Positioning -> Align Views Using Elements. 3. On this view, select the first geometrical element that you want to align.


Positioning a View

4. On the other view, select the second geometrical element that you want to align.

The first view is moved, and both views are aligned according to the elements you selected. 5. Click in the drawing, outside the views, to validate the alignment.


Positioning a View

When aligning views, remember that: ● if you select a circle as one of the elements to align, this circle will be aligned according to its center. ●

if you select lines as the two elements to align, these lines must be parallel.

If you want to align two views which are not directly linked to each other (i.e. which are not a parent view and its child view), you will first need to position a view independently of its reference view. For example, if view A (a front view) is the reference for view B (a projection view), and if view B is the reference for view C (a section view), then to align view A and view C, you first need to position view C independently of view B. Refer to Positioning a View Independently of its Reference View for more information.

Superposing Views You will learn how to superpose a view with another one according to their origins. Open the GenDrafting_Superpose_Views.CATDrawing document.


Positioning a View

1. Right-click the view that you want to superpose, the front view with dress-up, for example. A contextual menu is displayed. 2. Select View Positioning -> Superpose. 3. Click the view on which you want to superpose the first view. The first view is moved and superposed to the second one.

4. Click in the drawing, outside the views, to validate the superposition. If you want to superpose two views which are not directly linked to each other (i.e. which are not a parent view and its child view), you will first need to position a view independently of its reference view. For example, if view A (a front view) is the reference for view B (a projection view), and if view B is the reference for view C (a section view), then to superpose view A and view C, you first need to position either view B independently of view A, or view C independently of view B. Refer to Positioning a View Independently of its Reference View for more information.


Positioning a View

Setting Relative View Position You will learn how to re-position a view relatively to various elements (a line/callout, a point or the frame of a view). Open the GenDrafting_part_positioningview.CATDrawing document.

1. Right-click the view that you want to re-position, the isometric view for example. A contextual menu is displayed. 2. Select View Positioning -> Set Relative Position.


Positioning a View

A direction positioning line appears that is related to the isometric view. This isometric view can be positioned as desired and relatively to the front view. Note that the isometric view is assigned anchor points. 3. Select the direction positioning line end black square point. Once you have clicked the end square point, this point becomes a blinking red end point and remains so until you select a point or a view frame. You can also click the direction positioning line. In this case, the positioning line becomes a blinking line and remains so until you select a line (callout line).

Press the Ctrl key to move the positioning line according to a direction that is perpendicular to the positioning line.

4. Click the edge according to which you want the isometric view to be aligned. 5. Click one anchor point, for example, the bottom right one. The view anchor point is aligned according to the green point and thereby to the direction positioning line. 6. As you move the cursor over the direction positioning line, the position and length coordinates of the line appear.


Positioning a View

Note that you may also select the front view frame and align the isometric view to the front view according to the barycenter.

7. Using the green point, you can rotate the isometric view around the front view.


Positioning a View

8. Using the direction positioning line, translate the isometric view along the direction line and locate it at the desired distance.


Positioning a View

If you happen to modify the length of the direction positioning line, this new length will be kept whatever positioning modifications you may apply to the isometric view. Note that if you had previously positioned this isometric view according to a point, not only the line length but also the line angle will be kept. 9. Click in the free space to validate and leave the relative positioning mode.

As you use relative positioning, do not try to move the view outside of the anchor point frame. If you do so, you will leave the relative positioning mode.

You can also align a view relatively to one of the edges that are within this view. To do this, first select the direction positioning line, and then select an edge on the view to be aligned. As a result, the manipulators automatically align according to this selected edge.


Positioning a View



Positioning a View Independently of its Reference View

Positioning a View Independently of its Reference View At creation, views are by default positioned according to the parent (reference) view. This task will show you how to position a right projection view independently of its parent front view.

This functionality was called Do not align view up until V5 R10.

Open the GenDrafting_part.CATDrawing document. 1. Right-click the frame of the view that you want to position independently of its reference view. A contextual menu is displayed. 2. Select View Positioning -> Position Independently of Reference View.

3. Drag the view to the required location. 4. Click to position the view.


Positioning a View Independently of its Reference View

●

●

The Position Independently of Reference View command can be performed on one particular view at a time (you cannot multi-select views in this case). If you want to reposition independently-positioned views according to their reference view, repeat the scenario described above, this time selecting the Position According to Reference View command from the displayed contextual menu.



Locating Reference/Resulting Views

Locating Reference/Resulting Views This task shows how to navigate easily between reference/resulting views in the case of section views, section cuts, auxiliary views or detail views: ● You can locate the reference (i.e. parent) view of a resulting view. ●

You can locate the resulting (i.e. child) view of a reference view.

Open the GenDrafting_view_navigation.CATDrawing document.

Locating a Reference View 1. Right-click the detail view.

2. In the contextual menu, select Locate Reference View. The application window is reframed on the view where the detail view callout is defined.



Locating a Resulting View 1. Right-click the detail view callout.

2. In the contextual menu, select Locate Resulting View. The application window is reframed on the detail view.





Isolating Generated Views

Isolating Generated Views This task will show you how isolate either a selection of generated views (one or more), or all views in the drawing. Isolating a view amounts to: ● suppressing associativity between an existing CATPart (or CATProduct or CATModel) and the corresponding generated view, ●

transforming a generated view into an interactive view.

Open the GenDrafting_part.CATDrawing document.

Isolating a selection of views 1. Select the views you want to isolate (for example, the Top view, Bottom view, Left view and Right view), and right-click them. 2. From the contextual menu, select Selected objects -> Isolate. In this particular case, we selected several views but if you select only one view, the left view for example, then you need to select Left view object -> Isolate from the contextual menu.



The selected views are now isolated. If you perform one or more modifications on the CATPart, you will not be able to update the isolated views.

Isolating all views in the drawing 1. From the specification tree, right-click the drawing object (GenDrafting_part in this case). 2. From the contextual menu, select Drawing object -> Isolate.



All views in the drawing are now isolated. If you perform one or more modifications on the CATPart, you will not be able to update the drawing. ●

A view that has been isolated cannot be de-isolated.

●

Some dress-up elements and annotations may be deleted when isolating views.

●

●

●

Center lines are preserved when isolating views. However, they are longer be associated to geometry, but just to a point. Axis lines are preserved when isolating views. However, they are longer be associated to geometry, but just to 2 points. Dimensions are preserved when isolating views. However, they are longer be associated to geometry.



Restoring Deleted Elements

Restoring Deleted Generated Elements In this task, you will learn how to restore generated elements that have been deleted from a view.

Open the GenDrafting_Restore_Deleted.CATDrawing document. The view in this drawing was generated from a 3D part, GenDrafting_Restore_Deleted. CATPart. You do not need to open the part.

1. In the Drawing window, select the circle shown on the view and press the Del key. The circle is now deleted from the view. For the purpose of this exercise, you will now immediately restore the circle you deleted, but you could perform other operations before doing this (like save and close the drawing, or add annotations, for example).

2. Select the view and right-click the view frame. 3. In the contextual menu, choose Object Front View -> Restore Deleted. 4. You now have two possibilities: ● If you did not modify the part between the moment you deleted the circle and now (which is the case in this exercise): in the Power Input Field on the status bar, type the following command: c:force update. This updates the drawing in accordance with the 3D part, and restores the deleted item on the view.

●

If you modified the part between the moment you . deleted the circle and now: click the Update icon This updates the drawing with the latest changes on the part, and restores the deleted item on the view.


Restoring Deleted Elements



Locking a View

Locking a View This task will show you how to lock views. This may be useful if you need to modify a part without modifying the generated views. For example, when you need to modify a constraint in the 3D but not the generated views.

Locking a view means you are not allowed to: ● create views from a locked view ●

create either annotations or dimensions on this locked view

●

update, delete or cut the locked view.

The move command is still available when views are locked.

Open the GenDrafting_front_view.CATDrawing document.

1. Right-click the view to be modified (either the view frame or the view itself). 2. Select the Properties option from the contextual menu.


Locking a View

The Properties dialog box appears: 3. Select the View tab and select the Lock View check box. The other fields appear in gray indicating that you can no longer edit them. The views are locked as soon as you check the Lock View view button. The options OK, Apply and Cancel buttons (in the Properties dialog box) have no impact on the status of the view that is being locked.

4. The view is automatically locked. This is indicated in the specification tree:



Scaling a View

Scaling a View This task will show you how to modify the scale of a view.

Open the GenDrafting_detailview_scale.CATDrawing document.

1. Right-click the frame of the view to be modified. In this case, right-click the detail view.

2. Select the Properties option from the displayed contextual menu. 3. Enter the new Scale value in the Properties dialog box. For example, 3.


Scaling a View

4. Click OK. The detail view is updated. Note that only the generative elements (axes included) are scaled, neither the view name nor the dimension.



Renaming a View

Renaming a View This task will show you how to rename an existing view. Open the GenDrafting_Rename_View.CATDrawing document. 1. Right-click the frame of the view to be modified. 2. Select the Properties option from the displayed contextual menu.

3. Enter the new View Name in the Properties dialog box. For example, B as identifier (Ident). 4. Click OK.


Renaming a View

●

●

You can also access the Properties dialog box selecting the Edit->Properties commands. Note that the callout in the mother view also is now assigned a new identifier (B-B).



Adding a Generative Bill of Material

Adding a Generative Bill of Material This task will show you how to insert Bill of Material information into the active view. The Bill of Material corresponds to information on the product element which the views were generated from. The Bill of Material, or parts list, consists of an itemized list of the parts of a structure shown on a drawing or on an assembly. The Bill of Material can also include a recapitulation of the total number of parts used in a product. Choose a task: ● generating a bill of material, ●

modifying a bill of material: ❍ modifying the contents, ❍

modifying the contents visualization,

❍

updating a drawing after part modification.

Generating a Bill of Material Open the Product_Balloon.CATDrawing document. Open the Product_Balloon.CATProduct document.

●

If the active view has no link with the product, a message will state whether the insertion is all right.

●

If the active view has a link with a product, the Bill of Material can be inserted.

●

Whether the active view has a link with a product or not, you can go into an open product and click on this product before clicking on the CATDrawing in which you want to insert the Bill of Material. Note that you can perform this as often as you need.

You are in the background view You first selected Edit -> Background View from the toolbar.

1. Click the Insert Bill of Material icon


2. Click the Product from the specification tree in the CATProduct document. 3. Position the Bill of Material by clicking the point where you want to insert it.

OR You are in the working views You first selected Edit -> Working Views from the toolbar. 1. Select Insert -> Generation -> Bill of Material. http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/draug_C2/draugbt0802.htm (1 of 7)10/20/2004 5:18:10 PM


2. Position the Bill of Material by clicking the point where you want to insert it. In our example, click at the bottom right of the isometric view.

Whether you are in the background view or in the working views: ● Before positioning the Bill of Material, you can pre-define the anchor point position: this will determine the position of the Bill of Material in relation to the anchor point. For this, use the Text Properties toolbar and select either one of the top or one of the bottom anchor points. ●

When positioning the Bill of Material, you can select a line, in a title block for example. In this case, the Bill of Material will be inserted according to the position and orientation of this element, and without including a recapitulation table.

Note that, if no Product is or several Products are opened, you will first select the Product source.



The Bill of Material automatically appears:

Modifying a Bill of Material Modifying the contents To modify the contents of the Bill of Material and display given properties, go to the Product Structure workbench, and select Analyze->Bill of Material ->Listing Report from the menu bar.

Modifying the contents visualization



To modify the way you visualize the contents, modify the file called CATAsmBOM.CATRsc. It allows you to modify the columns size:

Bill Of Material cells are associated to the Product Structure Attributes.

Updating a Drawing after Part Modification



Open the Product_Balloon.CATDrawing document. Open the Product_Balloon.CATProduct document. Add a bill of material. You obtain the following bill of material:

1. Replace the Part Number "pm6-7b-1e shunt to body washer" by "New Name" (for this edit Part Properties in the Part contextual menu, and change the Part Number in Product tab). 2. Refresh the drawing. The Bill Of Material has changed, "pm6-7b-1e shunt to body washer" is replaced by "New Name".



3. Add a new product and a new part in this product (see Part Design user's guide and Assembly Design User's Guide):

4. Update the drawing, the Bill Of Material is updated:

The New product and its part appear in the Bill Of Material.



5. Remove the Product you have added in step 3 and update the drawing one more time:



Generating Balloons on a View

Generating Balloons on a View This task will show you how to generate in the active view balloons corresponding to references defined on the different parts of an assembly.

Open the Product_Balloon_Gen.CATProduct and Product_Balloon_Gen.CATDrawing documents.

1. Double-click the view in which you want to generate the balloons. In this particular case, double-click the front view. This view is now active.

4. Select the Generate Balloons icon

on the Dimension Generation toolbar.

The balloons that were previously created on the CATProduct are automatically generated onto the active view.



5. If needed, multi-select these balloons and modify the font size from the Text Properties toolbar. You can also select and drag a balloon to change its position.

Balloons generated

Balloons after the font size and position were modified:



6. If needed, insert a bill of material into the active view (Insert -> Generation -> Bill of Material from the menu bar).



The part numbers appear in the bill of material on the condition you specified it previously (Product Structure workbench: Analyze -> Bill of Material -> Listing Report from the menu bar).



Showing Geometry in Views

Showing Geometry in Views This task will show you how to visualize geometrical elements in all viewpoints as well as in a 3D viewer corresponding to the views analyzed. Note that you can analyze both text/dimension and edge type elements on all the views of a CATDrawing document. These views can be views generated from an assembly, a part or a .model. These views can also be interactive views.


1. Go to Tools -> Analyze -> Show Geometry in All Viewpoints menu bar command.

Provided there is at least one link between the CATDrawing document and a CATPart (or assembly, part or .model), a window appears with the 3D model corresponding to the CATDrawing views.



2. Move the cursor over the geometrical elements on one view. All the views are analyzed. The blue color corresponds to the immediate edge. The red color corresponds to the adjacent faces.

If the Animate option is on, the part automatically appears with the optimal position (visually speaking).



Modifying a Callout Graphism

Modifying a Callout Graphism This task will show you how to modify the graphical attributes of one (or more) callout used when generating auxiliary, section or detail views.

Callouts represent an operation that has been performed on a generative view (such as a section cut for example) and consequently do not behave as geometry. As a result, you cannot isolate callouts, nor can you apply transformation or symmetry operations to callouts.

Open the GenDrafting_part_Callout.CATDrawing document. 1. Multi-select the callout to be modified. In this example, we select both a section view callout and a detail callout. 2. Right-click these callout and select the Properties option from the contextual menu. 3. Select the Callout tab.





The preview displays both selected callout with attributes corresponding to the generated views.

The options you select in the Graphic Properties toolbar also influence the graphical attributes you apply to the selected callout (line color, line type, line weight, Copy Object Format icon, Pattern Chooser option).

●

Parameters you can set in this dialog box:

●

●

Auxiliary/Section Views: ❍ Switches for pre-defined types: continuous lines, mixed lines, elbows and extremities only or one arrow only. ❍

Line thickness

❍

Line type

❍

Extremity thickness

❍

Length

❍

Anchor point (head or tail)

Detail Views: ❍ Thickness



●

❍

Type

❍

Extremity thickness

❍

Length

❍

Anchor point

Arrows on Auxiliary/Section Views and Detail Views: ❍ Arrow length ❍

Head type

❍

Head length

❍

Head angle



You can choose the callout elements size not to be dependant on the view scale. For this: ● After callout creation, check Size not dependant on view scale in the previous dialog box or ●

Before callout creation, in the Tools->Options->Mechanical Design->Drafting>Callout, check the Size not dependant on view scale option:

4. Modify the callout graphical attributes as shown above. 5. Press OK.



Modifying a Callout Geometry

Modifying a Callout Geometry This task will show you how to modify the geometrical characteristics of a callout used when creating detail views, section views and section cuts. For modifying the detail and section callout, you will go through some kind of a sub-workbench and modify the existing callout geometry, reverse the callout direction or replace the callout.

Callouts represent an operation that has been performed on a generative view (such as a section cut for example) and consequently do not behave as geometry. As a result, you cannot isolate callouts, nor can you apply transformation or symmetry operations to callouts.

Open the GenDrafting_part_Callout.CATDrawing document.

1. Double-click the callout to be modified. The Edit/ Replace toolbar appears.



2. Drag one of the element components to the desired location. In this particular case, drag one segment extremity of the callout. By default and in order to modify more easily and more precisely the callout, the segment extremities are fixed. To make one segment no more constrained, right-click this segment and select the Line. object -> Unfix option from the contextual menu. 3. Click the End Profile Edition icon from the Edit/Replace toolbar. The callout arrow is now properly positioned and the section view (B-B) is automatically updated.



Open the GenDrafting_part_Callout.CATDrawing document.

1. Double-click the callout to be 2. reversed. Click the Invert Profile Direction icon from the Edit/Replace toolbar that now appears.

The callout is automatically inverted. ●

●

At any time, you can stop editing the callout. For this, click the End Profile Edition icon from the Edit/ replace toolbar. You cannot reverse the callout of a detail.



●

If after modifying a view containing a callout, the projection planes of the defining and the resulting views are inconsistent, the callout color is modified to show that there is an inconsistency in the drawing. For example, if you create a detail view from a section view and subsequently invert the direction of the section view profile in such a way that the projection plane of the detail view becomes inconsistent, then the callout color of the detail view will be modified.

3. Click the Replace Profile icon from the Edit/Replace toolbar now appears.

4. Start creating the new profile.

5. Double-click to end the new profile creation. The new profile automatically appears and the old one disappears.





Modifying Cut Elements in a Section View

Modifying Cut Elements in a Section View This task will show you how to modify cut elements in a section view generated from a CATProduct. Open the Product_Balloon2.CATDrawing document. 1. Right-click the section view A-A. 2. In the contextual menu -> Section view A-A object, select Overload properties. Select the cut element you want to edit. The following dialog box appears:


Modifying Cut Elements in a Section View

3. Select the element you want to edit in the dialog box and click the Edit button.

You can modify the following parameters: ● choose if the element will be cut in the section view or not, ●

if it will be use in the view when projecting,

●

if it will be shown or not

●

If hidden lines will be represented,

●

you can also modify graphic properties such as element color, line type and line thickness.

4. Uncheck Cut in section views. 5. Click OK.

The selected element is not cut anymore. In the Characteristics dialog box, the Reset button allows you to recover the values you had before changing information in the editor dialog box.



Modifying a Pattern

Modifying a Pattern This task will show you how to modify the pattern of a view. Patterns are used for area fills or, as is the case in this scenario, when cutting through material in section views/cuts or breakout views, for example.

Open the GenDrafting_exploded_isometric.CATDrawing document.

1. Right-click the pattern to be modified. For the purpose of our scenario, select the hatching pattern in the Section view.

2. Select Properties from the displayed contextual menu. The Properties dialog box displays the view current pattern. 3. In the Properties dialog box that appears, click the Pattern tab.


Modifying a Pattern

4. If you want to define your own pattern, choose a pattern type from the Type dropdown list: ● Hatching ●

Dotting

●

Coloring

●

Image

Or if you want to choose from the various patterns available, click the [...] button. This will display the pattern chooser, from which you can make your selection. For the purpose of this scenario, select Dotting from the Type drop-down list.


Modifying a Pattern

5. In the Pitch field, type 5 mm. 6. From the Color drop-down list, select black, for example. 7. Uncheck the Zigzag field, and then click OK. The pattern is modified.

Each part is assigned a specific pattern. Therefore, each time you modify a pattern using the Properties dialog box, all the patterns of the views generated from this part will be modified. These modifications will be applied to all existing sheets.


Modifying a Pattern

About part material patterns ●

●

●

Depending on the standard used by the drawing, you may be able to recover the pattern which is associated to a part material on a section view/cut or breakout view. For more information about associating a pattern to a material, please refer to the Real Time Rendering User's Guide. When editing the properties of a pattern associated with a part material, the software offers its own selection of patterns, and not the patterns defined in the standard. When editing the properties of a pattern associated with a part material, a specific button is available in the Properties dialog box: Reset using Part Material Pattern. When the original properties of the part material are modified, this button is activated to let you revert to the original part material pattern. For example, if you replace a pattern associated with a part material by a pattern from the standard, then the generated pattern is considered as overloaded, and will not be updated if you modify the properties of the part material. In this case, you can always revert to the original part material pattern using the Reset using Part Material Pattern button.



Duplicating Generative Geometry

Duplicating Generative Geometry This task will show you how to duplicate a generative view sub-element in order to modify a generated view sub-part independently from the part linked to the drawing.


1. Double-click the view you want to modify to activate it. The view is automatically highlighted. 2. Select the elements you want to modify and right-click them. 3. Choose Duplicate Geometry in the contextual menu.


Duplicating Generative Geometry

The selected geometry is duplicated on the view at the same position. It is highlighted after creation. Click on the drawing to de-select it. The resulting geometry is under the generative one. To workaround this problem, you can hide the corresponding generative geometry. [ Back ] [ Up ]


Generative View Styles

Generative View Styles The Generative Drafting workbench lets you use generative view styles, which are administrator-defined and specify the appearance and behavior of a generated view. For more information on the administration of generative view styles, refer to the Administration Tasks chapter.

Create views using generative view styles Create views using generative view styles. Switch a view to another generative view style Switch a view which uses a given generative view style to another style. Apply the generative style of a view to another view Apply the generative view style used to create a given view to another view. Apply a generative view style to a view Apply a generative view style to a view which was created without one. [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]


Creating a View using Generative View Styles

Creating a View using Generative View Styles This task will show you how to create a view using generative view styles. Generative view styles are defined by an administrator and specify the appearance and behavior of a generated view. For the purpose of this scenario, you will create a front view using generative view styles, but you can use generative view styles to create any type of view. Open the GenDrafting_part.CATPart document. Define a new drawing sheet. 1. Go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Administration tab, and uncheck the Prevent generative view style creation option. This activates the generative view style functionalities.

2. Click the Front View icon from the Views toolbar. The Generative View Style toolbar is automatically displayed.

3. Select one of the generative view styles available from the list. For example, select DefaultGenerativeStyle. The parameters defined in this file will be used when creating the view.



●

●

The generative view styles available in the list depend on what your administrator specified. The Generative View Style toolbar is displayed when creating most view types. However, when creating advanced front views, this toolbar is not displayed. Instead, the View Parameters dialog box (which is displayed when creating advanced front views) features an additional list, which enables you to select a generative view style.

4. In the 3D window, select a plane of the 3D part or a plane surface, to define the reference plane. 5. Click inside the sheet to generate the view.



The view is created using the selected generative view style. In our example, hidden edges are projected in orange. Note that you may obtain a different result. This result depends on the parameters defined in the generative view style you selected.

Using the standards editor, you can check the parameters defined in the generative view style you selected. To do this, go to Tools -> Standards. In the standards editor, choose the generativeparameters category, and then open the DefaultGenerativeStyle.xml file from the drop-down list. Then, for example, go to DefaultGenerativeStyle -> Drafting -> ViewDressup -> GeneratedGeometry > HiddenEdges, and select the Color parameter. You will see the what color is specified in your generative view style for the projection of hidden edges.

[ Up ] [ Next ]


Switching a View to Another Generative View Style

Switching a View to Another Generative View Style In this task, you will learn how to switch a view which uses a given generative view style to another style. Generative view styles are defined by an administrator and specify the appearance and behavior of a generated view.

Open the GenDrafting_GVS.CATDrawing document. This view was created using a specific generative view style which specifies that hidden edges should be displayed in orange, using a specific linetype and thickness.

1. Go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Administration tab, and uncheck the Prevent generative view style creation option. This activates the generative view style functionalities.



2. Right-click the front view to display the contextual menu. 3. Select Front view object -> Generative View Style -> Change View Style. The Change Style dialog box appears, displaying the list of generative views styles available.

The generative view styles available in the list depend on what your administrator specified. 4. Select a style, DefaultGenerativeStyle for example, and click OK. 5. Update the view by clicking the Update icon


, for example.


The view is updated and the parameters defined in the selected style are applied to the view. In our example, hidden edges are projected in black, with a different linetype and thickness than previously. Note that you may obtain a different result. This result depends on the parameters defined in the generative view style you selected.



Applying the Generative Style of a View to Another View

Applying the Generative Style of a View to Another View In this task, you will learn how to apply the generative view style used to create a given view to another view. Generative view styles are defined by an administrator and specify the appearance and behavior of a generated view.

Open the GenDrafting_GVS02.CATDrawing document. The front view was created using a specific generative view style (which specifies that hidden edges should be displayed in orange, using a specific linetype and thickness), while the isometric view was created without a generative view style.




2. Right-click the front view to display the contextual menu. 3. Select Front view object -> Generative View Style -> Apply View Style to. 4. Click on the isometric view to indicate that you want to apply to it the generative style of the front view.

5. Update the view by clicking the Update icon


, for example.


The isometric view is updated and the generative view style of the front view is applied to it.



Applying a Generative View Style to a View

Applying a Generative View Style to a View In this task, you will learn how to apply a generative view style to a view which was created without one. Generative view styles are defined by an administrator and specify the appearance and behavior of a generated view.

Open the GenDrafting_front_view.CATDrawing document. This view was created without a generative view style.


2. Right-click the front view to display the contextual menu. 3. Select Front view object -> Generative View Style -> Change View Style. The Change Style dialog box appears, displaying the list of generative views styles available.



The generative view styles available in the list depend on what your administrator specified. 4. Select a style, DefaultGenerativeStyle for example, and click OK. 5. Update the view by clicking the Update icon

, for example.

The view is updated. However, the selected style is not visible in the view yet. For the moment, the geometry is displayed in a specific color, because the original parameters of the view "overload" the generative view style parameters. (This means that the parameters of the selected generative view style have taken on the value of the parameters that were defined in the view before you applied the style to it.) You now need to reset the parameters of the generative view style to their original values in order for the new style to be visible in the view.



6. Right-click the front view to display the contextual menu once again. 7. Select Properties. The Properties dialog box is displayed. 8. On the View tab, in the Dress-up area, an asterisk * appears in front of the parameters which are considered as being overloaded.

The list in the Generative view style area shows the generative view style which is applied to the view.

9. Click the Reset to style values button, and then click OK to validate and exit the Properties dialog box.

The view is updated once again and the parameters defined in the selected generative



view style are reset to their original values and are applied to the view. In our example, hidden edges are projected in orange, with a different linetype and thickness than previously. Note that you may obtain a different result. This result depends on the parameters defined in the generative view style you selected.

[ Back ] [ Up ]


Dimension Generation

Dimension Generation The Generative Drafting workbench provides a simple method for generating dimensions. Generated dimensions are associative to the elements created from a part or an assembly.

Before you begin All you need to know before you start generating dimensions. Generate dimensions in one shot Generate dimensions in one shot from the constraints of a 3D part (distance, length, angle, radius and diameter constraints). Filter dimensions to be generated Set filters before dimension generation using the Dimension Generation Filters dialog box. Generate dimensions semi-automatically Generate dimensions step by step from the constraints of a 3D part (distance, length, angle, radius and diameter constraints). Analyze generated dimensions Perform an analysis of generated dimensions via the Generated Dimensions Analysis dialog box. Position dimensions Position dimensions (either generated dimensions or interactive dimensions) in a better way and on the active view exclusively. Analyze interfering dimensions Analyze dimensions that were generated and possibly re-positioned (Positioning icon) on the active view. Driving 3D constraints via generated dimensions Drive a 3D constraint via a 2D dimension that was generated from it.



About Dimension Generation

Before you begin This section provides the relevant information you need when performing dimensions generation, whichever command you activate to do so. In other words, the rules described in the following section are valid either when performing a Dimension Generation in One Shot or a Semi-Automatic Dimension Generation.

First of all, make sure you customize the dimension generation settings settings via Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Generation tab.

How are Generated Dimensions Positioned? Generated dimensions are positioned according to the views that are most representative. In other words, a dimension will appear on a view so that this dimension needs not be also created on another view. Generated dimensions will be positioned according to the following criteria: 1. on the view on which the dimension may be generated. 2. on the view on which the dimension is better visualized. For example, a view on which elements are visualized in non-hidden lines instead of hidden lines. 3. on the view with a bigger scale. 4. on views including more dimensions. The dimensions are generated on the views on the condition the appropriate settings were previously activated in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting > Generation tab.

What About the Dimensions that may be Generated from Constrained 3D Elements? To make sure the dimensions you need to handle in your session are those expected, here is a list presenting the constrained 3D elements and the resulting associated dimensions after generation. Note that for views that are generated from surfaces, only sketched constraints are generated.

Constrained 3D Elements

Generated Dimension Types



Sketcher 3D part Features: User-defined Pad Pocket Shaft/Groove Hole:

All dimensions: angle, distance, radius, diameter Angle, distance The dimensions below: All published dimensions of elements included in the user-defined feature Distance Distance Angle Constraints and associated dimensions:

- Simple

- Tapered

- Counterbored

- Countersunk

- Counterdrilled

- Threaded Fillet constraint variable Radius/Radii Shell Distance Thickness Distance Stiffener Distance Assembly constraints All assembly dimensions



About threaded hole dimensions A fractional dimension is generated for threads/taps defined in a 3D part which use standards with fraction as a symbolic representation (e.g. G1/8). This dimension is a fake dimension. It will be displayed using the color configured for fake dimensions in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimension tab, Analysis Display Mode category.

[ Up ] [ Next ]


Generating Dimensions in One Shot

Generating Dimensions in One Shot Before you begin, make sure you customized the following settings: Dimension generation: Go to Tools->Options->Mechanical Design->Drafting, and click on the Generation tab. Check the Analysis after generation option.

This task will show you how to generate dimensions in one shot from the constraints of a 3D part. Only the following constraints can be generated: distance, length, angle, radius and diameter. Constraints may be of three kinds: created manually (i) via the sketcher or (ii) via the 3D part, or else (iii) automatically created via internal parameters.

Open the GenDrafting_front_view.CATDrawing document. Open the GenDrafting_part. CATPart document. 1. Click the Generate Dimensions icon

from the Generation toolbar (Dimension

Generation sub-toolbar).

The dimensions are automatically generated on the front view, which in this particular case, is the only view in the drawing. In the case of drawings with several views, by default, dimensions are generated on all the views. To generate dimensions on specific views, simply select these views prior to generating dimensions. The selected views will be automatically highlighted, and dimensions will be generated on the selected views only.

Drawing view with generated dimensions and one selected dimension:

3D part with displayed dimension corresponding to the dimension selected on the drawing view:



The Generated Dimensions Analysis dialog box showing the dimensions and constraints generated for each part (in this case, there is only one) is automatically displayed.



2. Click OK to close the dialog box.

The generated dimensions are positioned according to the most representative views. In other words, a dimension will appear on a view so that this dimension needs not be also created on another view.



Filtering Dimension Generation

Filtering Dimension Generation This task will show you how to set filters before dimension generation using the Dimension Generation Filters dialog box.

Open the GEAR-REDUCER.CATProduct and the GEAR-REDUCER.CATDrawing documents. Tile your windows horizontally to view both your drawing and the related part. To do this, select Window -> Tile Horizontally from the menu bar. Go to Tools->Options->Mechanical Design->Drafting, and click on the Generation tab. Check the Filters before generation option. This automatically launches the dimension generation filters before generating dimensions.

1. By default, dimensions will be generated on all views. If you want to generate dimensions on a specific view, select this view.

2. Click the Generate Dimensions icon sub-toolbar).

from the Generation toolbar (Dimension Generation

The Dimension Generation Filters dialog box is automatically displayed.



The Dimension Generation Filters dialog box displays the parameters and filters that you can use for dimension generation, lists the elements for which dimensions will be generated, and specifies how many constraints there are for each listed element. Let's describe the dialog box more precisely: Type of constraint These options let you specify what type of constraints you want to generate dimensions from in your drawing. ● Sketcher constraints: generates dimensions from constraints created in the Sketcher workbench. ●

●

●

3D constraints: generates dimensions from 3D constraints (for instance an Offset between two planes). Assembly constraints: generates dimensions from assembly constraints. This option is active only in the case of products or assemblies. Measured constraints: generates dimensions from measured constraints.

Options These options let you generate additional dimension types. http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/draug_C2/draugbt1015.htm (2 of 7)10/20/2004 5:21:43 PM

Filtering Dimension Generation ●

●

...associated with un-represented elements: generates dimensions from constraints associated with elements that are not represented on the drawing (i.e. which are not visible in the various views your drawing may contain). In this case, the generated dimensions will appear as not attached to any element in the drawing. ...with design tolerances: generates dimensions from constraints with design tolerances, and applies the constraint tolerance to the corresponding generated dimension.

Other ●

Retrieve excluded constraints: retrieves all the constraints which you previously excluded (either using the Not Generated icon when performing a step by step generation, or by removing a generated dimension from the drawing), and re-generates the dimension. This icon is active only when there are dimensions to retrieve.

●

●

Add all parts: adds all parts that belong to the selected product or assembly to the list. This button is active only in the case of products or assemblies. Remove: removes the selected element from the list. Dimensions will not be generated for this element.

By default, only the product is displayed in the list of elements for which dimensions will be generated, and only the Assembly constraints and Measured options are active: if you left the dialog box as is, dimensions would only be generated from the product assembly constraints and measured constraints. 3. You will now add additional elements to generate dimensions for. You have two possibilities: ● If you want to generate dimensions for specific elements only: in the drawing, select each element for which you want to generate dimensions. The elements you select are added to the list.



●

If you want to generate dimensions for all elements, click the Add all parts button to add to the list all the parts belonging to the product.

For the purpose of this exercise, click the Add all parts button. All elements are added to the list. You can notice that the Sketcher constraints and 3D constraints options are now active and selected.

When the same part is used several times within a given product (as is the case for Bearing (Part1.1) in this scenario), generations for this part are generated only once, for a single part instance (instead of being generated for all part instances). By default, dimensions are generated on the part instance which is the first in the product specification tree. If you want to generate dimensions on a specific part instance, you need to select this instance. 4. Unselect the 3D constraints option to specify that dimensions from 3D constraints should not be generated. You can notice that the list is updated with the proper number of constraints for each element.



5. Click OK. The dimensions are generated on the drawing.



Depending on whether the Analysis after generation option was selected in Tools->Options, the Generated Dimension Analysis dialog box may now appear.

5. Click OK to close the Generated Dimension Analysis dialog box.





Generating Dimensions Semi-Automatically

Generating Dimensions Semi-Automatically Before you begin, make sure you customized the following settings: Dimension generation: Go to Tools->Options->Mechanical Design->Drafting, and click on the Generation tab. Check the Analysis after generation option.

This task will show you how to generate dimensions step by step from the constraints of a 3D part. Only the following constraints can be generated: distance, length, angle, radius and diameter. Constraints may be of three kinds: created manually (i) via the sketcher or (ii) via the 3D part, or (iii) automatically created via internal parameters. Open the GenDrafting_part.CATDrawing. In this sample, constraints were manually created. You will then go to Generative Drafting workbench and create views from this part.

1. Select the views on which you want to generate dimensions. For example, the front view. 2. Click the Generate Dimensions Step by Step icon

from the Generation toolbar

(Dimension Generation sub-toolbar).

The Step-by-step generation dialog box displays and will remain displayed until the end of the dimension generation.



3. Check the Visualization in 3D button to see the constraints corresponding to the dimensions to be created on the views. 4. Check the Timeout option. The default timeout is set to two seconds (2s). Enter the timeout value you need for example, three seconds (3s). 5. Click the Next Dimension Generation switch button

to start the dimension

generation. Dimensions appear one after the other on the views. Now, you might need to pause the generation for modifying the dimension position for example. 6. Click the Pause in Dimension Generation switch button paused. 7. Select the dimension to be modified.


. The generation is


8. Drag the dimension to its new position.



Note that, at this step (pause), you can perform all kinds of modifications before the dimension generation.

●

You want the dimension last generated before you clicked the Pause switch not to be generated on the view? Perform as follows: 1. Click the Not Generated option in the Step by Step Generation dialog box.

The constraint is automatically excluded and the dimension will not generated.

●

●

You want the currently generated dimension to be transferred (via Transfer icon)? Perform as follows: 1. Click the Transfer icon from the Step-by-Step Generation dialog box. 2. Click the Pause switch. 3. Select the frame of the view in which the current dimension, or the dimension last created, is to be pasted.

You want to modify the graphical attributes of the current dimension? Perform as follows: You simply need to apply the desired attributes in the required Properties toolbar.

9. Click again the Next Dimension Generation switch button

and continue the

process. The dimensions are automatically generated on all the views. The dimensions appear as shown, for example, on the front view documented in this particular case.



The Generated Dimensions Analysis dialog box showing the dimensions and constraints generated for each part (in this case, there is only one) is automatically displayed. This dialog box is described in detail in Dimension Generation Analysis.



Note that you can stop at anytime the generation by clicking accelerate the process by clicking

.



or, on the contrary,

Analyzing Generated Dimensions

Analyzing Generated Dimensions This task will show you how to analyze generated dimensions via the Generated Dimension Analysis dialog box.

Open the GenDrafting_part.CATPart and then the GenDrafting_front_view. CATDrawing documents. Tile your windows horizontally to view both your drawing and the related part. To do this, select Window -> Tile Horizontally from the menu bar. Go to Tools->Options->Mechanical Design->Drafting, and click on the Generation tab. Check the Analysis after generation option. This automatically launches the generated dimensions analysis after dimension generation.

1. Click the Generate Dimensions icon

from the Generation toolbar (Dimension

Generation sub-toolbar).



The dimensions are generated on the view. You can select a dimension in the drawing to highlight the corresponding constraint in the 3D, and vice-versa.

The Generated Dimension Analysis dialog box is automatically displayed.



The Generated Dimension Analysis dialog box displays the number of constraints available in the 3D, as well as the number of dimensions generated on the drawing, for each part or product in the drawing (in this case, there is only one part). You can use the options in this dialog box to highlight the dimensions in the drafting sheet as well as the associated 3D constraints you can visualize in your Part or Product document. Let's describe the dialog box more precisely: Constraint Analysis in 3D These options let you highlight specific constraints on the 3D part. ● Generated constraints: highlights all the constraints which are associated with the dimensions generated on the drawing. ●

●

Other constraints: highlights all the constraints for which dimensions have not been generated on the drawing. Excluded constraints: highlights all the constraints which have not been taken into account during the dimension generation (this can be because you previously excluded them using the Not Generated icon when performing a step by step generation, or because you removed a generated dimension from the drawing).



Dimension Analysis in 2D These options let you highlight specific dimensions on the drawing. ● New Generated Dimensions: highlights the dimensions which were generated during the latest dimension generation (this is useful if you generate dimensions several times). ● ●

Generated Dimensions: highlights all the generated dimensions. Other Dimensions: highlights the dimensions created manually via the Interactive Drafting workbench.

2. Check the Generated constraints and Generated Dimensions options. The generated dimensions are highlighted on the drawing, and the constraints associated with the generated dimensions are highlighted on the 3D part.

2. Click OK to close the dialog box.



●

The Analysis after generation option automatically displays the Generated Dimension Analysis dialog box (after dimension generation), each time you generate dimensions either automatically (Generating Dimensions icon semi-automatically (Generating Dimensions Step by Step icon

●

●

) or

).

By default, the Analysis after generation option in Tools->Options is checked, and the Generated Dimension Analysis dialog box is automatically displayed at the end of dimension generation. You can deactivate this default by unselecting the Analysis after generation option. You can also launch an analysis explicitly when needed. To do this, go to Tools>Dimension Generation->Analysis. The Generated Dimension Analysis dialog box will be displayed immediately.



Positioning Dimensions (View per View)

Positioning Dimensions (View per View) This task will show you how to position distance and length dimensions (either generated dimensions or interactive dimensions) in a better way. These dimensions will be positioned on the active view exclusively.

Open the GenDrafting_part_ positioningdim.CATDrawing document.

In addition, select the View -> Toolbar -> Positioning option from the menu bar in order to have the necessary toolbar (Positioning toolbar) displayed in the workbench.

1. Click the Dimension Positioning icon

from the Positioning

toolbar. OR 1. Select Tools -> Positioning -> Dimension Positioning... from the menu bar. The dimensions are automatically re-positioned.


Positioning Dimensions (View per View)

If you want to have dimension interferences analyzed, use the Dimension Analysis icon (or select Tools->Analyze->Dimension Analysis from the menu bar). You will thus be able to visualize and manage interfering dimensions.



Analyzing Interfering Dimensions

Analyzing Interfering Dimensions This task will show you how to analyze dimensions that were generated and possibly re-positioned (Positioning icon) on the active view.

Open the GenDrafting_part_ positioningdim02.CATDrawing document. In addition, select the View -> Toolbar -> Analyze option from the menu bar.

1. Click the Dimension Analysis icon from the Analyze toolbar. OR 1. Select Tools -> Analyze -> Dimensions Analysis from the menu bar.

The Analyze dialog box appears with the following options:

●

List with all the annotations badly placed/ Optimized list with the annotations badly placed You can choose to have either a whole or a filtered list with the interfering elements



●

●

●

Total number of elements in the current list As you choose the above list type, the total number of interfering elements is automatically updated Number of the pointed element You are provided a number for the element currently pointed as an interfering element Scanner (Start, Before, Update, Next, End) You can navigate among the list of interfering elements

The interfering dimensions are automatically displayed in the red orange color. Small circles allow visualizing the interference location.



2. Select Optimized list with the annotations badly placed option.

3. Click the Next switch

.

4. Start modifying the dimension positions one after the other. Note that you may either reposition one dimension or either delete or copy this dimension, if needed. View with interfering dimension View once the interfering dimension has been deleted: (Number 3):



Driving 3D Constraints via Generated Dimensions

Driving 3D Constraints via Generated Dimensions In this task, you will learn how to drive 3D constraints via generated dimensions. Go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting. On the Dimension tab, select Activate analysis display mode. Then, click the Types and colors button to define the characteristics that will be assigned to constrained geometry.

The Types and colors of dimensions dialog box lets you select the colors you want to assign to driving dimensions. Select the colors shown below, for example.

On the Administration tab, make sure that the Prevent dimensions from driving 3D constraints option is not selected.

Open the Pinmounting.CATPart document.



Open the GenDrafting_drive_3dconstraints.CATDrawing document.

1. On the front view, double-click the dimension which defines the top radius (Dimension.5 object). The Constraint Definition dialog box appears.



2. Type 30 in the radius field to change the radius definition, and click OK. The dimension is edited.

3. On the top view, double-click the dimension which defines the rounded corner radius (Dimension.1 object). The Parameter Definition dialog box appears.



4. Type 30 in the value field, and click OK. The dimension is edited.

5. In the CATPart window, click the Update button updated and reflects your modifications:


to update the part. The part is


6. In the CATDrawing window, click the Update button

to update the drawing. The

drawing is updated with the latest modifications in the part:

[ Back ] [ Up ]


Dimension Manipulation

Dimension Manipulation Dimension commands are documented in the Interactive Drafting user's guide. As such, the information detailed in this section is presented in an Interactive Drafting context.

Still, you can open the GenDrafting_part.CATDrawing document directory and thus manipulate dimensions in a Generative Drafting context.

These dimensions will be associative to the elements created from a part or an assembly. When created, these elements are associated with a view.

Note that for views that are generated from surfaces, only sketched constraints are generated.

Before you begin: You should be familiar with important concepts. Create dimensions: Create dimensions by clicking elements. Create half-dimensions: Create half dimensions on distance, angle, diameter, cylinders, diameter edges and diameter tangents but not on cumulate dimensions. Create cumulated dimensions: Create cumulated dimensions on a view using selection. Create stacked dimensions: Create stacked dimensions using selection.



Create explicit dimensions: Create dimensions using explicit selection both of the desired icon and of the required geometrical elements.

Create/modify angle dimensions: Create an angle dimension and perform the following kinds of modifications: new angle sector or turn an angle sector into a supplementary sector. Create chamfer dimensions: Create chamfer dimensions. Create associative thread dimensions: Create associative thread dimensions. Create/modify coordinate dimensions: Automatically create coordinate dimensions on elements. Create a holes dimensions table: Create a table containing holes dimensions (diameter and center coordinates). Create points coordinates table: Create a table containing 2D and 3D points coordinates. Create/modify radius curvature dimensions: Create and modify a radius curvature dimension. This lets you know the curvature radius at a given point on a curve (spline, ellipse, etc.). Create dimensions on curves: You can create dimensions on the overall size of any kind of curve, whether it is canonical or not (e.g.: line, circle, ellipse, spline, etc.). You can also create dimensions on the overall size between 2 curves, or between a curve and a line, for example.



Create dimensions between an element and a view axis: Create dimensions between an element and a view axis (one of the two axes or the origin). Modify the dimension type: Modify the dimension type as you create a dimension. On other words, you modify the dimension attributes. Re-route dimensions: Re-route dimensions, i.e. recalculate dimensions taking into account new geometry elements. Interrupt one or more extension lines: Interrupt manually one or more extension lines of one or more dimensions, either using the contextual menu or the Insert menu bar option. Modify the dimension line location: Use the mouse to modify dimension line location either before or after creating dimensions. Modify the dimension value text position: Use the cursor to modify dimension value text position. Specify the dimension value position: Automatically or explicitly position the dimension value inside or outside the area between extremity symbols. Add text before/after the dimension value: Insert text before or after the dimension value. Modify the dimension overrun/blanking: Use the Blanking Edition dialog box to modify dimension overrun or blanking. Line up dimensions (free space): Line up dimensions relatively to a point in the free space. Line up dimensions (reference): Line up dimensions according to a given reference.



Create a datum feature: Use the Datum Feature Creation dialog box to create a datum feature. Modify a datum feature: Modify a datum feature by editing it. Create a geometrical tolerance: Use the Geometric Dimensioning And Tolerancing Parameters dialog box to create geometrical tolerances. Modify a geometrical tolerance: Use the Geometric Dimensioning And Tolerancing Parameters dialog box to modify geometrical tolerances. Copy a geometrical tolerance: Copy an existing geometrical tolerance and then edit the content for creating a new one. Create driving dimensions Create dimensions that will drive associated constrained geometry. [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]


Before You Begin

Before You Begin You should be familiar with the following concepts:

Creating Dimensions You can create (and therefore modify) the following types of dimensions:

Dimensions created on one element: ●

Length dimensions

●

Diameter dimensions

●

Radius dimensions

●

Radius curvature dimensions

Dimensions created on two elements: ●

Distance dimensions

●

Angle dimensions

●

Diameter/Radius Cylinder dimensions

Note that you can create half-dimensions on distance, angle, diameter cylinder, diameter edge and diameter tangent dimensions but not on cumulate dimensions.

Modifying the Dimension Attributes You can modify the following attributes at any time before you click to validate the dimension creation:

Modify while creating: ●

Type

●

Measure direction

●

Angle sector

●

One symbol

●

Diameter/Radius center

Modify while or just after creating: ●

Value position

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driugbt0699.htm (1 of 4)10/20/2004 5:23:28 PM

Before You Begin

●

Extension line overrun/blanking (either one or both)

●

Text before/after

●

Properties (see further down)

●

Swap to diameter/radius

Manipulating Dimensions By default, when manipulating dimensions, you will use the following functionalities: ● dimension following the cursor: go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimension tab, to use automatic positioning ●

●

●

●

●

●

global move: go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimension tab, to move precisely dimension line, dimension value, secondary part of a dimension line. blanking manipulators (available when modifying a dimension): go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Manipulators tab, not to visualize blanking manipulators or to visualize other manipulators either when creating or when modifying a dimension (Overrun, Blanking, Insert text before, Insert text after, Move value, Move dimension line, Move DimLine Secondary Part). value snapped between the dimension lines symbols: go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimension tab, if you do not want to have the possibility to snap the dimension value between both symbols of the dimension line and/or you want to snap the dimension position on the grid. during creation: to switch temporarily the Dimension following the cursor option, hold on the ctrl key. during creation and edition: to switch temporarily the Activate Snapping option, hold on the shift key. Clicking on the dimension symbols will invert them. during angle dimension creation: if the Dimension following the cursor option is activated, you can swap the angle sector according to the mouse position holding on the ctrl and shift keys. If the Dimension following the cursor option is not activated, you can swap to the complementary angle sector holding on the ctrl key and clicking on the dimension line.

Dimension Properties You can apply given properties to all the dimensions you are going to create. For this, use the Dimension Properties toolbar.


Before You Begin

●

Line type (regular, two parts, one part leader, or two parts leader)

●

Tolerance type

●

Tolerance value

● ●

●

●

●

Numerical Display Format Precision.

For the ISOCOMB combined tolerance, use the following type of syntax in the tolerance value field: H6 (+0.5 / -0.3)

When creating a new drawing, the Unit field (here: NUM.DIMM) drives the unit of the dimensions to be created. The value which is used by default in this field is usually defined in the standards (Tools -> Standards -> [StandardName] -> General -> DefaultNumericalFormatLength or DefaultNumericalFormatAngle). However, if no value is defined in the standards, the one which will be used by default is that defined as your default unit choice in Tools -> Options -> Parameters and Measure -> Units tab. When editing an existing drawing, if you change your default unit choice in Tools -> Options -> Parameters and Measure -> Units tab, then the numerical display format which best corresponds to the selected unit is automatically selected in the toolbar instead of the current default value.


Before You Begin

Using Styles You can use styles (i.e. a set of default values for each kind of element) when creating dimensions in drawings created with version V5 R11 and later (or pre-R11 drawings whose standard has been updated or changed in V5 R11 and later). Styles are defined in the standard used by the drawing and managed by the administrator. When creating a dimension, the Style toolbar displays the styles available for this type of dimension. (By default, the Style toolbar is situated at the top left of screen.) If only one style is available, it will be used by default.

If several styles are available for this type of dimension, you can choose the style that you want to use to create this dimension by selecting it from the Style toolbar. Refer to Using Styles for more information.

In drawings created with versions up to V5 R10, you can create dimensions using default values. Refer to Setting Properties As Default in Pre-R11 Drawings and to Using Properties Set as Default in Pre-R11 Drawings for more information.

[ Up ] [ Next ]


Creating Dimensions

Creating Dimensions In this task, you will learn how to create dimensions. When creating dimensions on elements, you can preview the dimensions to be created.

Creating Dimensions Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. 1. On the Dimensioning toolbar, click the Dimensions icon.

2. Click a first element in the view. For example, a circle. 3. If needed, click a second element in the view. The dimension type is automatically defined according to the selected elements ( the Tools Palette).

or

in

At this step, the command options in the Tools Palette (

) allows you to

position the dimension using one of the modes below: Projected, Forced or True Length modes. These options are also available in the contextual menu. This toolbar is situated at the bottom right of screen. If you cannot see it properly, just undock it.

4. Click the Force Dimension on element command option from the Tools Palette.


Creating Dimensions

5. Right-click to access the contextual menu and select 1 symbol.

The dimension becomes a one-symbol dimension:

During the dimension creation step, you can switch between one-symbol or two-symbols dimension by selecting or deselecting 1 symbol in the contextual menu. Once the dimension has been created, you must use the Properties menu to specify whether you want to use one or two symbols. Right-click the dimension and in the contextual menu, choose Properties. Click the Dimension Line tab and then check Symbol 2 to display twosymbols dimension, or uncheck this option to display one-symbol dimension.

6. Click in the drawing window to validate the dimension creation.


Creating Dimensions

7. Create another dimension on a line.

8. Select the two dimensions with the Ctrl key (you can move them both). 9. Start creating another dimension: click the command icon and select another circle:

Click in the drawing to validate the creation. 10. Right-click the dimension you just created and in the contextual menu, choose Dimension.3 Object and select Swap to Radius:


Creating Dimensions

The diameter dimension has swapped to radius dimension:

11. Right-click the dimension again, and in the contextual menu, choose Dimension.3 Object, and uncheck Extend to Center: the radius extension line is not extended until the center anymore.


Creating Dimensions

●

●

You can use this functionality through the Properties menu: right-click on the dimension and choose Properties. On the Dimension Line tab, select the type of extension you want from the Extension list: From standard, Till center or Not till center.

This functionality works with radius dimension and one-symbol diameter dimension.


Creating Dimensions

●

●

●

When you create a dimension between a generated element in a broken view and a sketched element, the dimension value may be false to let the user set a fake dimension value. When you create a dimension between an axis and another element, the dimension created by the software is automatically an half dimension. To bypass this problem, during creation, uncheck Half Dimensions in the contextual menu (right-click). You can generate errors when refreshing the dimensions in the following cases: ❍ In this drawing the dimension "80.14" is measured from the line B to the line C:

If the corresponding part is modified and the chamfer removed, when the drawing is refreshed the dimension is colored in fuchsia because the line B was removed with the chamfer:


Creating Dimensions

❍

If the two elements separated by the dimension value are move and then merged the it will generate an error and the dimension will be fuchsia:


Creating Dimensions

Properties If you right-click the dimension before creation, a contextual menu lets you modify the dimension type and value orientation as well as add funnels. Using this contextual menu once the dimension is created, you can also access the Properties options.

Associativity If one parent element of the dimension is deleted or deactivated, as soon as you update the drawing (either 3D Generative or 2D Interactive drawing), the orphan dimension becomes purple on the condition you activated the Analysis Display Mode option toolbar.

from the Tools

Ensure that if you key in "c: Force Update" to synchronize the drawing with the 3D, any nonassociative dimension will disappear.

Colors can be customized using the Analysis Display Mode option via Tools->Options->Drafting, Dimension tab).

from the Tools toolbar or

Driving Dimensions You can create dimensions that will, by default, drive the geometry. For this: ● Go to Tools -> Options (Dimension tab) and activate the Create driving dimension option from the Options dialog box.

●

Create and/or modify the desired dimension on the geometry. If needed, you can use the Tools Palette and define the Value of the dimension you want to be driving.

For more information, refer to Creating Dimension Constraints.


Creating Dimensions

True Dimensions True Length dimensions can be created using the True Length Dimensions option Tools Palette or using the contextual menu.

from the

Before using true dimensions, make sure that you have not set only create non-associative dimensions option in Tools -> Options -> Associativity on 3D. In order to work, this functionality must be applied to an associative dimension.

Half-Dimensions You can create half-dimensions. For this, right-click the dimension as you create it and select the Half-dimension option from the contextual menu.

Extension Line Anchor As you create a dimension between two elements, one of these elements being a circle, you can select the extension line anchor, for this, you can : ● use the contextual menu (positioned on the dimension) and select one of the available Extension Line anchor options.


Creating Dimensions

You will thus position the extension line: ● at one extremity of the circle (First Anchor)

●

●

at the center of the circle (Second Anchor)

●

at one extremity of the circle (Third Anchor)

drag the yellow symbol to the one of the anchors (anchors appear when the cursor is over the yellow symbol):

If in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimension, you have checked Dimension following the mouse option, then to move the extension line anchor you must press the Crtl key before selecting the yellow symbol (to switch temporarily the option).



Creating Half-Dimensions

Creating Half-Dimensions Half-Dimensions are useful in the case of revolved features or elements using a plane symmetry. Actually it allows to create the dimensions only on half the geometry.

This task will show you how to create a half-dimension. You can create halfdimensions on distance, angle, diameter, cylinders, diameter edges and diameter tangents but not on cumulate dimensions.

Open the Brackets_views05.CATDrawing document.

1. Click the Dimensions icon

from the

Dimensioning toolbar. 2. Click a first element in the view. For example, an edge. 3. If needed, click a second element in the view. For example, another edge. 4. Right-click the dimension and select the Half Dimension option from the contextual menu.



The half-dimension appears. Only one extension line is displayed. The dimension line is shortened with specific overrun, gap and length. The value is not centered on the dimension line. The attributes mentioned in Dimension parameters drive the dimension graphic display.

●

●

Once you select the half-dimension option from the contextual menu, all the following dimensions you create will be assigned the half-dimension mode. If you want to create dimensions in the standard mode, go back to the contextual menu and de-activate the Half Dimension option. You can create a half-dimension directly by selecting first an axis line and then an other element (which is not an axis). The half-dimension value will be the double of the measured value between the elements. If you don't want a half-dimension to be created when selecting such elements, uncheck Half Dimensions from the contextual menu (right-click) when creating the dimension.

Associativity in the case of half-dimensions is different from associativity in the case of standard dimensions. For example, the half diameter dimension below is associated to the axis and the element, whereas a standard diameter is associated to both symmetrical elements.



Standard diameter edge:

Half diameter edge:



Creating Cumulated Dimensions

Creating Cumulated Dimensions This task will show you how to create cumulated dimensions on a view. Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. Go to Tools->Options->Drafting->Dimensions->Line-up and uncheck Align cumulated dimension values. 1. Click the Cumulated Dimensions icon

from the Dimensioning toolbar

(Dimensions sub-toolbar).

2. Click a first point on the view. 3. Click a second point on the view. You just created a first dimension within the cumulated dimension system.



4. Click a third point on the view. You now created a second cumulated dimension in the system. You can create as many cumulated dimensions as desired.



Note that if you move one dimension line as you create a cumulated dimension, all the lines will move accordingly. 5. Click in the free space to end the cumulated dimension system creation.

If the cumulated dimensions are set with value oriented along dimension line, set the CUMLTxtReference dimension parameter in the standards. 6. Go to Tools->Options->Drafting->Dimensions->Line-up and check Align cumulated dimension values.

7. Create the same dimensions as previously, this time positioning them below the http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driugbt0616.htm (3 of 4)10/20/2004 5:23:53 PM


drawing.

This time, dimensions are centered. This functionality does not work for radius/diameter dimensions. By default, the Align cumulated dimension values option is active. This aligns cumulated dimensions by centering them. If you switch to another standard, all dimension values will be repositioned according to the new standard (even if you specified their position manually before switching standards).



Creating Stacked Dimensions

Creating Stacked Dimensions This task will show you how to create stacked dimensions on a view. Stacked dimensions are parallel lines with a common extension line.

Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. Go to Tools->Options->Mechanical Design->Drafting->Dimension->Line-Up and uncheck Align stacked dimension values. 1. Click the Stacked Dimensions icon from the Dimensioning toolbar (Dimensions sub-toolbar).

2. Click a first point on the view. 3. Click a second point on the view. You just created a first dimension within the stacked dimension system.



4. Click a third point on the view. You now created a second stacked dimension in the system.



5. Click a fourth point on the view. You now created a third stacked dimension in the system. Note that this stacked dimension inserted properly into the system. You can create as many stacked dimensions as desired.

6. Click in the free space to end the stacked dimension creation. 7. Go to Tools->Options->Drafting->Dimensions->Line-up and check Align stacked dimension values. 8. Create the same dimensions as previously, this time positioning them below the drawing.



This time, dimensions are aligned. This functionality does not work for radius/diameter dimensions.

●

●

When you add a dimension into the cumulated dimension system, in order to have this system properly displayed (dimensions positioned relatively to one another), the position of the smallest dimension (i.e. the one that is the closest from the geometry), is not modified. The value of the spacing between the system dimensions is defined in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimension tab, Line-Up section.


Creating Stacked Dimensions ●

As you create the dimensions in the system, you can move the whole system. Still, you actually move the smallest dimension: all the other dimensions in the system are automatically aligned to this smallest dimension.



Creating Explicit Dimensions

Creating Explicit Dimensions This task will show you how to create a dimension you explicitly decide to be: ● a length/distance dimension ●

an angle dimension

●

a radius dimension

●

a diameter dimension

You will select the required elements. Note that when entering the command dedicated to the creation of a given type of dimension, the default orientation will be the orientation most adequate.

Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document.

1. Click the desired icon from the Dimensioning toolbar (Dimensions sub-toolbar).

length/distance dimension angle dimension radius dimension diameter dimension 2. Click as many elements as required in the view. The Tools Palette automatically appears, displaying dimension modes, except in the case of angle dimensions.

3. If needed, define the dimension mode in the Tools Palette (



) using one of the modes below: Projected, Forced or True Length modes. These options are also available in the contextual menu.

Length/Distance

Angle

Radius

Diameter



For radius dimensions, you can activate the Foreshortened option in the contextual menu Properties -> Dimension Line.

It allows you to transform a radius dimension line into a foreshortened radius dimension line. Then you can choose the text position (on long segment or short segment), the dimension text orientation according to the dimension line ( parallel or convergent), the angle value, the ratio value (short segment/long segment), and the point scale value. You can also specify whether you want to unfix the extremity point of the foreshortened dimension line, which will let you move the extremity point using a yellow manipulator.



Creating/Modifying Angle Dimensions

Creating/Modifying Angle Dimensions This task will show you how to create an angle dimension and perform the following kinds of modifications: new angle sector or turn an angle sector into a supplementary sector. Create two lines.

1. Select the Dimension icon from the Dimensioning toolbar. 2. Select both lines to be dimensioned, one after the other. The angle dimension appears in the sector associated to both selected lines.

3. Drag the angle dimension line to the desired quadrant (or sector).

You can move the dimension to a new sector by using the contextual menu:


Creating/Modifying Angle Dimensions

Right-click the angle dimension and select from the contextual menu either a given Angle sector or the Complementary Angle sector. You can also CTRLclick the dimension line.



Creating Chamfer Dimensions

Creating Chamfer Dimensions This task will show you how to create a chamfer dimension. You can use two different methods: ● create chamfer dimensions manually, ●

create chamfer dimensions using chamfer detection.

Creating chamfer dimensions manually Open the IntDrafting_Dim_Chamfer.CATDrawing document. 1. Go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimensions tab and make sure the Detect chamfer option is not selected.

2. Click the Chamfer Dimensions icon



3. In the Tools Palette which is displayed, you can choose: ● The format of the dimension: ❍ Length x Length (19,1 x 19,1 in our example)

●

❍

Length x Angle (19.1 x - 46°84'8" in our example)

❍

Angle x Length (- 46°84'8" x 19.1 in our example)

❍

Length 19,1.

The representation mode: ❍

One symbol

❍

Two symbols



Choose the Length x Length format and the One symbol mode

.

You can also access these options using the contextual menu: at any time during the chamfer dimension creation, you can right-click to display the contextual menu.

4. Select the element to be dimensioned.

5. Select a reference line or surface.

6. You have two options: ● Click on the sheet to end the dimension creation. The chamfer dimension is computed with an implicit second reference line that is perpendicular to the first one.



OR ● Select a second reference line or surface. In this case, the chamfer dimension is computed according to both reference lines you selected.

In a Generative Drafting context (i.e. in the case of a generative view), you must do this, i.e. you must explicitly select the second reference line.



In any case, the dimension is associated to all the elements you selected.

Creating chamfer dimensions using chamfer detection Open the IntDrafting_Dim_Chamfer.CATDrawing document. 1. Go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimensions tab and make sure the Detect chamfer option is selected.

2. Click the Chamfer Dimensions icon



3. In the Tools Palette which is displayed (as well as in the contextual menu), you can choose the format of the dimension and the representation mode. For more information, refer to Step 2 in Creating chamfer dimensions manually.

Choose the Length x Length format and the One symbol mode

.

4. Fly the mouse over the element to be dimensioned. You can notice that, depending on where you position the cursor, the auto-detection agent indicates a different order for taking elements into account when creating the chamfer dimension: ● 1 indicates the element to be dimensioned, ●

2 indicates the line which will be used as the first reference,

●

3 indicates the line which will be used as the second reference.



5. Click when you are satisfied with the order offered by the auto-detection agent. For example, click to accept the 3 - 1 - 2 order. The chamfer dimension is computed according to the first and the second auto-detected reference lines.

At this stage, if you are not satisfied with the order you just accepted, you can still click to select the first reference line, and, optionally, the second reference line. This amounts to creating the chamfer dimension manually.

6. Click to end the chamfer dimension creation.

The dimension is associated to all auto-detected elements.

Remarks about chamfer dimensions http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driugbt0617.htm (5 of 7)10/20/2004 5:24:48 PM


●

●

In a Generative Drafting context, you can create chamfer dimensions for the following types of cylindrical shapes: cylinder/cone/cylinder, plane/cone/cone, plane/cone/cylinder, plane/plane/plane.

When creating chamfer dimension on cylindrical shapes in a Generative Drafting context, remember that: ❍ in the case of projection views, the projection plane needs to be parallel to the cylinder axis. ❍

❍

●

●

in the case of section views or section cuts, the section plane needs to to be parallel to, and to go through, the cylinder axis. the sketched profile on which the cylinder (or the cone) is based must be a circle.

All settings defined in Tools->Option->Mechanical Design->Drafting (Dimensions and Manipulators tabs) are taken into account when creating chamfer dimensions. When editing chamfer dimension text properties (Edit > Properties command, Dimension Texts tab), if you assign any kind or prefix or suffix to the main value (e.g. associated text, fake dimension, tolerance, text before/after, etc.), the text will actually be placed after the first value, as shown here.





Creating Associative Thread Dimensions

Creating Associative Thread Dimensions This task will show you how to create associative thread dimensions. Open the intthread.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Thread Dimension icon from the Dimensioning toolbar (Dimensions sub-toolbar).

2. Select the thread to be dimensioned in the front view. The diameter dimension appears.

3.

Click the Thread Dimension icon

.

4. Select the two lines representing the thread to be dimensioned in the section view.



Two dimensions appear: ● the thread diameter, ●

●

●

the thread depth.

The dimension prefix (M in this example) is issued from the thread standard defined when creating the hole in the 3D Part. In the top views you can modify threads dimensions orientation.



Creating/Modifying Coordinate Dimensions

Creating/Modifying Coordinate Dimensions This task will show you how to automatically create 2D or 3D coordinate dimensions on elements. Coordinate dimensions allow you to define the coordinates of a point relative to the X, Y, and possibly Z, axes.

Open the PointSketch.CATDrawing document.

1. Click the Coordinate Dimension icon

from the Dimensioning toolbar (Dimensions

sub-toolbar).

The Tools palette appears with two options: 2D Coordinates

lets you create 2D (x,

y) coordinate dimensions for interactive geometry, 3D Coordinates

lets you create

3D (x, y, z) coordinate dimensions for generative geometry. ● These options are also available via the contextual menu. ●

This choice of options is valid for generative geometry only. In the case of a generative drawing, or in the case of a drawing containing a mix of generative and interactive elements, both options will be available, but if you select sketched (i.e. interactive) geometry, the 2D Coordinates option will be applied automatically (even if you selected the 3D Coordinates option). In the case of a purely interactive drawing, the options will not be displayed at all, and only the 2D Coordinates option will be applied.

2. Select the 3D Coordinates

option in the Tools Palette, as you will be

dimensioning elements generated from the 3D.



3. Select the element for which you want to create the 3D coordinate dimension. The coordinate dimension is created immediately.

●

●

At this point, you can right-click to display the contextual menu, which allows you add a breakpoint to the leader, or to choose the leader symbol. You can also select a set of elements by trapping them with the mouse, to create several coordinate dimensions in one shot.

4. Click in the free space to end the dimension creation. 5. Select the coordinate dimension to modify its position. The dimension is highlighted and its anchor point appears in yellow. 6. Drag the dimension to a new position.

●

●

Coordinates are relative to the absolute axis system except for views created by selecting a 3D local axis system. The yellow anchor point is associative and is linked to the element you dimensioned.





Creating a Holes Dimensions Table

Creating a Hole Dimension Table This task will show you how to create a Hole and Center Line Dimension Table (containing diameter and center coordinates).

Open the alesage.CATDrawing document. 1. Select one or more holes and center lines (only center lines not associated with a hole) in the drawing.

2. Click the Hole Dimension Table icon the table creation command.

on the Dimensioning toolbar to launch



3. The Axis System and Table Parameters dialog box is displayed. Axis system: Indicate the holes coordinates 2D reference axis system. In this example, click on the view origin (you can also select two lines or click anywhere in the drawing, or enter the origin coordinate). Two reference axis appear:

You can rotate or flip the axis using the Flip horizontally and Flip vertically icons and choose to represent the axis system by checking the Create representation box. Title: Type the table title. Columns: ● Choose a label (A, B, C... or 1, 2, 3...). If you want column numbering to start with values other than A or 1, click the icon ●

and specify the start value.

Select and name the column to display.

Table format: ● Check Transpose table to invert columns and rows. ● ●

Check Sort table content to sort the table elements. Check Split table to split the table into several tables. For more information on splitting tables, see Creating/Modifying a table.



4. Choose 2D reference axis system for the axis system from the associated drop-down list. 5. Type the table name in the Title field. 6. Select Label: A, B, C from the Column drop-down list (you can also choose the Index naming mode) to give a label to the selected points in the drawing. 7. Check X, Y and Diameter to have four columns corresponding to the hole labels and to the Cartesian coordinates. Then enter a title for each column. 8. Check Transpose table to invert columns and rows in the table.

9. Check Sort table content and then click to define the sorting the icon parameters. 10. To sort the table by descending X coordinates, choose X in the Sort by combo box, and select Descending. Then, click Close.

11. Click OK to validate your settings and then click in the drawing to define the location of the table. The table is generated.





Creating a Points Coordinates Table

Creating a Points Coordinates Table This task will show you how to create a table containing coordinates of points from 2D and 3D. Open the PointSketch.CATDrawing document. 1. Multi-select the points on one of the views or on all views.

2. Click the Coordinate Dimension Table icon launch the table creation command.


on the Dimensioning toolbar to


3. The Axis system and table parameters dialog box is displayed. Axis system: You can choose to use the 2D axis system. It can be either the one of the view or userdefined. In this case, it can be defined interactively by either: ● indicating a point by clicking in the view, ●

selecting a point,

●

selecting two lines.

Or it can be defined by typing the origin coordinates in the X and Y fields. You can rotate or flip the axis using the Flip horizontally and Flip vertically icons and choose to represent the axis system by checking the Create representation box. Or you can choose to use the 3D axis system. In this case, it is the absolute axis of the 3D model, or, if the model is a single part, a local axis. Title: Type the table title. Columns: ● Choose a label (A, B, C... or 1, 2, 3...). If you want column numbering to start with values other than A or 1, click the icon and specify the start value. ●

Select and name the column to display,

Table format: ● Check Transpose table to invert columns and rows. ● ●

Check Sort table content to sort the table elements. Check Split table to split the table into several tables. For more information on splitting tables, see Creating/Modifying a table.



4. Choose Axis system.1 for the axis system from the associated drop-down list. 5. Type the table name in the Title field. 6. Select Label: A, B, C from the Column drop-down list (you can also choose the Index naming mode) to give a label to the selected points in the drawing. 7. Check X, Y and Z to create four columns corresponding to the points labels and to the Cartesian coordinates. Then enter a title for each column in the associated field. 8. Check Transpose table to invert columns and rows in the table.

9. Check Sort table content and click the to define the sorting parameters. icon 10. To sort the table by descending X coordinates, choose X in the Sort by combo box, and select Descending. Then, click Close.

11. Click OK to validate your settings and then click in the drawing to define the location of the table. The table is generated.





Creating/Modifying Radius Curvature Dimensions

Creating Radius Curvature Dimensions This task will show you how to create and modify a radius curvature dimension. A radius curvature dimension lets you know the curvature radius at a given point on a curve (spline, ellipse, etc.).

Create a spline.

1. Select the Dimension icon

from the Dimensioning toolbar.

2. Move the cursor over the spline. You can notice that the cursor changes to indicate that you are going to create a dimension on a spline.

3. On the spline, click the point where you want to create the radius curvature dimension. A preview of the radius curvature dimension is displayed. 4. Click to validate the dimension creation.


Creating/Modifying Radius Curvature Dimensions

5. Move the dimension over the spline to modify the dimension.



Creating Overall Curve Dimensions

Creating Overall Curve Dimensions This task will show you how to create overall dimensions on curves. You can create dimensions on the overall horizontal or vertical size of any kind of curve, whether it is canonical or not (e.g.: ellipse, spline, etc.). You can also create dimensions on the overall size between 2 curves, or between a curve and a line, for example. Go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting. On the Dimension tab, uncheck Dimension following the cursor (CTRL toggles). Open the Dimension_Spline.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Dimension icon


2. In the Tools Palette, click the Force horizontal dimension in view icon to specify that you want to create the dimension based on the horizontal direction. The direction of overall curve dimensions can only be horizontal or vertical. 3. Select a spline. A preview of the dimension is displayed.



If the preview shows a curvilinear length dimension instead of an overall curve dimension, right-click to display the contextual menu and select Overall instead of Curvilinear Length. 4. Click elsewhere in the drawing to validate the dimension creation. The dimension you created indicates the overall horizontal size of the spline. 5. Again, click the Dimension icon

.

6. In the Tools Palette, click the Force vertical dimension in view icon to specify that you want to create the dimension based on the vertical direction. 7. Select the bottom line and the other spline. A preview is displayed. Yellow manipulators and point indicators appear: these let you select precisely the points that you want the dimension to take into account.



8. Move the spline dimension manipulator to point 7 on the spline, for example.

The preview is updated.



9. Click in the drawing to validate the dimension creation. The dimension you created indicates the overall vertical distance between the bottom line and point 7 of the spline.



Creating Curvilinear Length Dimensions

Creating Curvilinear Length Dimensions This task will show you how to create dimensions for the curvilinear length of a curve, i.e. to measure the overall length of a curve. Open the CurvilinearDimension.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Dimension icon


2. Select a curve. A preview of the dimension is displayed. By default, this preview shows an overall curve dimension.

3. Right-click the preview to display the contextual menu and select Curvilinear Length instead of Overall. 4. Still in the contextual menu, select a representation mode for the dimension line: ●

Offset displays the dimension line as an offset of the measured curve.

●

Parallel displays the dimension line as a translation of the measured curve.

●

Linear displays the dimension line as linear.

Select Parallel, for example. 5. Optionally drag the dimension line and/or the dimension value to position them as http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driugbt0628.htm (1 of 5)10/20/2004 5:26:46 PM


wanted. 6. Click elsewhere in the drawing to validate the dimension creation. The semi-arc symbol displayed over the dimension value symbolizes a curvilinear length dimension. You can now handle the dimension just like any other dimension.

7. Again, click the Dimension icon

.

8. Select another curve. This time, the preview of the dimension shows a curvilinear length dimension (your previous selection was memorized). 9. Once again, right-click to display the contextual menu and select Offset as the representation mode for the dimension line. 10. Click in the drawing to validate the dimension creation.



11. Repeat steps 7 to 9, this time selecting Linear as the representation mode for the dimension line. 12. Still in the contextual menu, select Dimension Representation -> Force Horizontal Dimension in View to specify the dimension line orientation. 13. Click in the drawing to validate the dimension creation.

More About Curvilinear Length Dimensions General remarks ●

●

●

●

Curvilinear length dimensions can be created using the Dimensions, Length/Distance Dimensions and Technological Feature Dimensions commands; they cannot be created using the Stacked Dimensions and Cumulated Dimensions commands. You can create curvilinear length dimensions for all types of curves: splines, circles, arcs of circle, conics, etc. Note that in the case of circles and arcs of circle, they will be called circular length dimensions. The curvilinear length symbol is defined by the administrator in the standards. The linear representation mode for the dimension line is: ❍ forbidden in the case of closed curves. ❍

the only authorized representation mode for True Length dimensions.

Limitations ●

You cannot change the dimension line representation mode or orientation after the



dimension has been created. ●

●

In the case of the parallel and offset representation modes, the dimension value cannot be moved out of the curve limits. As a result, you cannot specify the dimension value position (Inside, Outside, Auto). In some cases, depending on the curve and on the offset value, the offset representation mode cannot be computed: ❍ In certain cases, when switching from another representation mode to the offset mode, the dimension will be previewed as being not-up-to-date (i.e. using the color configured in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimension tab, Analysis Display Mode): try to move the cursor closer to the dimension.

❍

In other cases, you will not be able to position the dimension further than a certain limit. The examples below show the limits for positioning a curvilinear length dimension in offset mode for a spline.



●

●

In the case of curvilinear length dimensions in offset mode, it is recommended to activate the Constant offset between dimension line and geometry setting in Tools > Options > Mechanical Design > Drafting > Dimension tab. This will ensure that the dimension remains associative if the geometry is moved. When dimensioning a 3D curve that is not planar, the extension line of the curve will extend to the projection of the endpoints of the curve in the view plane of the dimension. As a result, the dimension may seem to point nowhere.

●

Partial curvilinear length dimensions are not supported.

●

Curvilinear dimensions cannot be measured along a direction.

●

Curvilinear dimensions cannot be driving dimensions.



Creating Dimensions along a Reference Direction

Creating Dimensions along a Reference Direction This task will show you how to create dimensions along a reference direction, i.e. measure the projection of a segment/distance onto a direction. This direction is determined using either a linear element, a fixed angle in the view or a combination of both. Dimensions along a reference direction can be created for length, distance, diameter tangent, radius tangent, and overall curve dimensions, as well as on linear (i.e. not angular) cumulated or stacked dimensions. Open the GEAR-REDUCER2.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Dimension icon


2. In the Tools Palette, click the Intersection Point Detection icon . Refer to Creating dimensions between intersection points for more information about this functionality. 3. Click the first element, in this case, an intersection point.



4. Click the second element.

The dimension to be created is previewed. In the Tools Palette, click the Force dimension along a direction icon:



Several options are then displayed in the Tools Palette:

●

●

●

Dimension along a direction creates the dimension using a linear element (line, axis line, center line) as the reference direction, or using an angle to define the reference direction relatively to a linear element. In the latter case, key in a value in the Angle field. Dimension perpendicular to a direction creates the dimension perpendicularly to a linear element. Dimension along a fixed angle in view creates the dimension using a fixed angle in the view. In this case, key in a value in the Angle field. Note that such a dimension follows the view rotation. Thus, a dimension line with a 30 deg angle in a view which is set at 45 deg (relatively to the sheet) will be equivalent to a dimension line with a 75 deg angle relatively to the sheet.

These options are also available in the contextual menu that you can display during the dimension creation.

5. Click the Dimension along a direction icon scenario, leave the Angle field set to 0 deg.

. For the purpose of this

6. Select a linear element to use as the reference direction. Once created, the dimension will be associative to this element.



The dimension is updated so as to measure the distance between the selected points once projected onto the reference direction.

7. Drag the mouse to position the dimension as wanted. 8. Click to validate the dimension creation.



More About Dimensions Along a Reference Direction ●

●

In the case of a dimension along or perpendicular to a direction, if you delete the linear element used as the reference direction, the dimension will be automatically converted into a dimension along a fixed angle in view (the angle being that of the reference element in the view before its deletion). The behavior of a dimension along or perpendicular to a direction will actually depend on whether the Only create non-associative dimensions option is activated in Tools > Options > Mechanical Design > Drafting > Dimension tab, Associativity on 3D button: ❍

❍

●

●

●

●

If it is activated, then the dimension will actually be a dimension along a fixed angle in the view (the angle being that of the reference element in the view). If it is not activated, then the dimension will always match the direction of the element defining the reference direction.

Once a dimension along a reference direction has been created, you cannot modify the elements that define the direction of measure, i.e. either the linear element used as the reference direction or the fixed angle in view. The reference direction will not be taken into account when re-routing dimensions (Re-route Dimension command). Dimensions along a reference direction cannot be driving dimensions. So, if the Create driving dimension option is activated in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimension tab, you will not be able to drive dimensions when dimensioning along a direction. Dimensions created in a shot (i.e. cumulated/stacked dimensions, or dimensions sharing the same type as the first one) all have the same reference direction.



Creating Dimensions between Intersection Points

Creating Dimensions between Intersection Points This task will show you how to create dimensions between an intersection point and an element or between two intersection points. Open the GEAR-REDUCER2.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Dimension icon


2. In the Tools Palette, click the Intersection Point Detection icon

.

3. Position the mouse over the first intersection point. An intersection point is the meeting point of: ● ● ●

2 extensions lines (as shown in this example) 2 lines a line and an extension line

A preview of the intersection point is displayed.



In the case of drawings with many elements displayed on screen, intersection points may sometimes be difficult to detect. If this happens (i. e. if the intersection point is not previewed or if the previewed intersection point is not the one you want), simply position the mouse over the first and then the second reference element. The proper intersection point will then be previewed.

4. Click to create the intersection point. The point is created, as well as construction lines and coincidence constraints between the point and its reference elements. The display and behavior of intersection points is defined by the administrator in the standards. Indeed, the administrator can specify the style that should be applied to the intersection point and construction line, whether the intersection point can be printed or not, and whether construction lines should be displayed and/or printable.

5. Now, position the mouse over the second intersection point.



6. Click to create the intersection point. A preview of the dimension is displayed. By default, this dimension is a distance dimension.



At this point, if you want to create a diameter dimension or a radius dimension rather than a distance dimension, you can right-click to display a contextual menu in which you will be able to change the dimension type from the default Distance to Diameter Edge or Radius Edge.

For the purpose of this scenario, leave the default option, Distance, selected. 7. Using the mouse, position the dimension as wanted. 8. Click to validate and end the dimension creation.





Creating Dimensions between an Element and a View Axis

Creating Dimensions between an Element and a View Axis In this task, you will learn how to create dimensions between an element and a view axis (one of the two axes or the origin).

Open the IntDrafting_Viewplane_Front.CATDrawing document. Go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> General and check Display in the current view to display the view axis.

1. Click the Dimensions icon


2. Click a first element in the view.

3. Select one of the two view axes or the origin.


Creating Dimensions between an Element and a View Axis

4. Click anywhere in the drawing window to confirm the dimension creation.

The dimension is created.



Re-routing Dimensions

Re-routing Dimensions This task will show you how to re-route dimensions, i.e. to recalculate dimensions taking into account new geometry elements which are compatible with the re-routed dimension type.

Re-routing dimensions can be particularly useful in the case of isolated dimensions resulting from V4 to V5 migration. Indeed, re-routing isolated dimensions to the geometry enables you make them associative.

Open the Reroute_Dimensions.CATDrawing document. You can notice that the dimension properties are customized.

1. Select the Re-route Dimension icon

from the Dimensioning toolbar (Extension Line

Interruptions sub-toolbar).

2. Select the angle dimension. You can notice that the cursor indicates the type of dimension you are selecting.

3. Select the first element you want to take into account for the dimension re-routing, and then the second element.



Select the first element.

Then, select the second element.

During this operation, the cursor gives a graphic preview of what type of element you are selecting (in this case, lines).

A preview of the re-routed angle dimension is displayed.

4. Click to validate the dimension creation.



5. You can proceed in the same manner to re-route the other dimension types available on the drawing.

●

●

●

●

Always make sure that the element(s) to which you are re-routing dimensions are compatible with the re-routed dimension type. For example, when re-routing a radius dimension, you need to select a curved element. You cannot re-route chamfer dimensions. In a Generative Drafting context, you cannot re-route dimensions generated via the Generate Dimensions command. Re-routing dimensions preserves dimension properties when you customized them.



Modifying the Dimension Type

Modifying the Dimension Type This task will show you how to modify the dimension type as you create a dimension. In other words, you modify the dimension attributes. In this particular example, we will apply a Radius Center dimension type to a hole. Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. 1. Start creating a diameter dimension, for example. If needed, modify the dimensions location by dragging it with the cursor. 2. Right-click the dimension. 3. Select the required dimension type from the displayed contextual menu. For example, Radius Center.

The diameter dimension is automatically turned into a radius dimension. 4. Click in the drawing to validate the dimension creation. If needed, you can modify the dimension location.


Modifying the Dimension Type

●

●

When you display the contextual menu, you can decide that you want to restore the dimension value to its original position. For this, select the Restore Value Position option from the contextual menu. When you display the contextual menu, you can define the value orientation with the screen, view or dimension line as reference, or still horizontal, vertical or according to a fixed angle. These options are available in the Value Orientation dialog box.



Interrupting Extension Lines

Interrupting Extension Lines This task will show you how to interrupt manually one or more extension lines of one or more dimensions.

Open the Interruption_ExtLine01.CATDrawing document.

1. You have several possibilities: ● Right-click a dimension and select the Dimension.1 Object -> Create Interruption(s) option from the contextual menu. ●

●

Select a dimension and click Insert -> Dimensioning -> Dimension Edition -> Create Interruption(s) from the menu bar. Select a dimension and click on the Create Interruption(s) icon Dimensioning toolbar (Dimension Edition sub-toolbar).

in the

●

You can also select the interruption command first, and then the dimension.

●

You can multi-select several dimensions either using the Ctrl key or by trap.

2. In the Tools Palette, indicate if you want to create the interruption on one extension line or on both extension lines.



3. Click to indicate the first point defining the interruption to be created. 4. Click to indicate the second point defining the interruption to be created.

If you have chosen to create the interruption on one extension line, the interruption is automatically created on the extension line which is closest to where you click.

5. To remove the interruption you created, you have several possibilities: ● Right-click the dimension and select Dimension.1 Object -> Remove Interruption (s) from the contextual menu. ●

●

Select the dimension and click Insert -> Dimensioning -> Dimension Edition -> Remove Interruption(s) from the menu bar. Select the dimension and click on the Remove Interruption(s) icon Dimensioning toolbar (Dimension Edition sub-toolbar).

in the

6. In the Tools Palette, indicate if you want to remove a single interruption on an extension line, all interruptions on an extension line, or all interruptions on both extension lines. In this case, leave the Remove One Interruption icon selected.



7. Click to indicate the extension line from which you want to remove the interruption. The interruption is removed from the extension line which is closest to where you click.

●

● ●

● ●

When creating or removing interruptions, you can select the dimension either before or after selecting the appropriate command. If you move the dimension, the interruption will remain as you created it. If you modify either the overrun and / or the blanking, the interruption also remains the same. You can apply a maximum of eight interruptions to an extension line. Extension lines with funnels cannot be interrupted. Likewise, you cannot add funnels to extension lines with interruptions.



Modifying the Dimension Value Text Position

Modifying the Dimension Value Text Position This task will show you how to modify the position of the dimension value text using the mouse. Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. Create a distance dimension, for example.

1. Click the Select icon

, if needed.

2. Select the dimension value text.

3. Drag the value text to the new position. 4. Click to validate the position. Note that as a useful help, you can press the Shift key and switch to the Snap to Point on or off mode. The mode is temporarily changed (as long as you keep the button pressed). When the


Modifying the Dimension Value Text Position

Snap to Point mode is on, as you select and drag the dimension value, an anchor appears to help you locate the middle of the dimension.

At any time, you can restore the original value text position. To do this, right-click the dimension you positioned and select Restore Value Position from the contextual menu.



Modifying the Dimension Line Location

Modifying the Dimension Line Location This task will show you how to modify dimension line location either as you create or after creating dimensions. Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. Create a distance dimension, for example.

1. Click the Select icon needed.

, if

2. Select the dimension to be modified. For example, a distance dimension. The distance dimension is highlighted.

3. Select the dimension line. 4. Drag the dimension line to the new position.

You can also modify the dimension line location using the extension line. Note that as a useful help, you can press the Shift button and switch to the Snap to Point on or off mode. The mode is temporarily changed (as long as you keep the button pressed).


http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driugbt0603.htm10/20/2004 5:28:04 PM

Specifying the Dimension Value Position

Specifying the Dimension Value Position In this task, you will learn how to place automatically the value outside the area between extremity symbols when this area is too small, or how to explicitly position the value inside or outside the area between extremity symbols. Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. Create a distance dimension, for example.

1. Click the Select , if needed. icon 2. Right-click the dimension to be modified.

3. In the contextual menu, select Properties. The Properties dialog box is displayed. 4. Click on the Value tab.


Specifying the Dimension Value Position

5. In the Value Orientation area, there are three options in the Position field.

●

Auto: positions the value inside the area between extremity symbols whenever this is possible; otherwise, positions it outside.

●

Inside: positions the value inside the area between extremity symbols.

●

Outside: positions the value outside the area between extremity symbols.

6. Select Auto. If you change the dimension from now on, and the value does not fit inside the area between extremity symbols, the value will be automatically positioned outside. Try it by reducing the dimension as shown in our example. ●

●

The Auto position of the dimension value will be disabled if you modify the position of the dimension value text using the mouse (i.e. if you manually move it). You can restore the original position of the dimension value by right-clicking the dimension and selecting Restore Value Position from the contextual menu. If you switch between Auto, Inside, and Outside, make sure the dimension value is properly positioned by restoring the original position of the dimension value (use the Restore Value Position option from the contextual menu).



Adding Text Before/After the Dimension Value

Adding Text Before/After the Dimension Value This task will show you how to insert text before or after the dimension value. Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. Create a distance dimension, for example. Go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Manipulators tab, and check the Modification box for the Insert text before and the Insert text after options.


, if needed.

2. Click the dimension to be modified. The dimension is highlighted and two manipulators appear, both before and after the dimension value. 3. Click the manipulator before the dimension value, for example.


Adding Text Before/After the Dimension Value

The Insert Text Before dialog box is displayed. 4. Enter the text that you want to add before the dimension value, L= for instance.

5. Click OK. The text is automatically inserted before the dimension value.

Note that any created Text Before is automatically added to the dropdown list in the dialog box and can therefore be selected again from this list. 6. Click in the free space.



Modifying the Dimensions Overrun/Blanking

Modifying the Dimension Overrun/Blanking This task shows how to modify dimensions extension line overrun and/or blanking either together or separately. Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. Create a distance dimension, for example. Go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Manipulators tab, and check the Modification box for the Modify overrun and the Modify blanking options.


, if needed.

2. Drag the overrun manipulator(s) to a new position, as shown below:

If you want to modify one extension line only, press the Ctrl key and drag the desired manipulator. 3. Drag the blanking manipulator(s) to a new position, as shown below:



4. If you need to be more precise, double-click the manipulator. The Blanking Edition dialog box is displayed. 5. Enter the desired value to modify the blanking. You can also modify the overrun/ blanking of only one extension line of the dimension. 6. Double-click the overrun manipulator(s).

The Overrun Edition dialog box appears. 7. Enter the desired overrun value and un-check the Apply to both sides option from the Overrun Edition dialog box.

Note that you can also right-click the dimension and select the Edit -> Properties option from the displayed contextual menu. The Properties dialog box appears. Select the Extension Line tab and modify the desired value(s) of the Overrun / Blanking Extremities option(s).



Overrun is the overrun minimum value. As an example, for a cumulated dimension (for ISO Standard):

You can increase the overrun size.

You cannot decrease it below the minimum value.

To set Cumulate dimension extension line length and text position, customize the following parameter in the standards: CUMLExtMode in Dimension parameters.



Lining up Dimensions (Free Space)

Lining up Dimensions (Free Space) This task will show you how to line up the following dimensions relative to a point in the free space: ● Length dimensions ●

Distance dimensions

●

Radius dimensions

●

Diameter dimensions

●

Angle dimensions

In other words, you are going to organize dimensions into a system with a linear offset. The offset will align the dimensions to each others as well as the smallest dimension to the reference element. Open the LineUp_Dimensions01.CATDrawing document.

1. Select the dimensions to be lined up. 2. Right click and select Line-up option from the contextual menu

or click on the Line-Up icon

.

You can also select Tools->Positioning->Line-up item from the menu bar.

3. Click anywhere on the drawing.



The Line Up dialog box appears: 4. Enter the desired Linear offset value. For example, 20 mm. 5. Click the Only organize into systems option. 6. Click OK to validate. The position of the smallest system dimension will not be modified. The stacked system dimensions will be aligned to this smallest dimension.

The dimensions are now aligned:



When you click in the free space, the linear offset between the smallest dimension and the reference is automatically set to 0 value. The space between two dimensions will be the space defined in the Options dialog box (Tools->Options, Mechanical Design ->Drafting at the left of the dialog box, Dimension tab, Line Up paragraph). See Dimension Creation for more details.



Lining up Dimensions (Reference)

Lining up Dimensions (Reference) This task will show you how to line up the following dimensions according to a given reference: ● Length dimensions ●

Distance dimensions

●

Radius dimensions

●

Diameter dimensions

●

Angle dimensions

Open the LineUp_Dimensions02.CATDrawing document. 1. Go to Tools->Options->Mechanical Design->Drafting->Dimensions tab.

The offset you can set in this dialog box corresponds to:



2. Select the dimensions to be lined-up. 3. Right click and select Line-up item from the contextual menu.

You can also select the Tools -> Positioning -> Line-up item from the menu bar.

4. Select the element that will be used as reference for positioning dimensions. See the example above. The Line Up dialog box appears. You can see that the default values are the ones set in Tools Options menu (see step 1).

5. Enter the required offset values in the Line Up dialog box and, if needed, deactivate the Only organize into systems option.



The smallest dimension positions with respect to the element selected and offsets by 20 mm. And offset between dimension is equal to 30mm.



Creating a Datum Feature

Creating a Datum Feature This task will show you how to create a datum feature. Open the Brackets_views08.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Datum from the Feature icon Dimensioning toolbar. 2. Select the point at which you want the datum feature to be attached (attachment point). 3. Select the point at which you want the datum feature to be anchored (anchor point).

The Datum Feature Creation dialog box is displayed with A as default value (incremental value). 4. Enter the desired character string, if needed.

5. Click OK. The datum feature is created. An extension line is automatically created on the datum feature.


Creating a Datum Feature

●

●

●

The character string that is edited in the Datum Feature Creation dialog box is simultaneously previewed on the drawing. When you create more than one datum feature, the character string of this datum feature is automatically incremented. To change Datum Feature ANSI representation into ASME representation, change the TXTDatumMode parameter of your standard file (see Dimension parameters): ASME

TXTDatumMode = 1 (Normal)

ANSI

TXTDatumMode = 2 (Flag)



Modifying a Datum Feature

Modifying a Datum Feature This task shows you how to modify a datum feature by editing it. Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. Create a datum feature.

1. Double-click the datum feature you want to modify.

The Datum Feature Modification dialog box is displayed. 2. Modify the datum feature value. For example, enter B instead of A. 3. Click OK.

4. Click in the free space or select another icon. The datum feature is modified.


Modifying a Datum Feature



Creating a Geometrical Tolerance

Creating a Geometrical Tolerance This task shows you how to create a geometrical tolerance (annotation). You can also copy an existing geometric tolerance. You can set text properties either before or after you create the text. ● Creating a geometrical tolerance ●

Leader orientation

●

Geometrical tolerance orientation

Creating a Geometrical Tolerance Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Geometric Tolerance icon

from the Dimensioning toolbar (Tolerancing sub-toolbar).

2. Select an element (geometry, dimension, text or point) or click in the free space to position the anchor point of the geometrical tolerance.

●

●

●

If you select an element, the anchor point will be an arrow. Note that you can modify this symbol by editing the annotation leader.

If you select a point in the free space, the anchor point will be a small balloon.

If you select a dimension or a text, no leader will be created. The geometric tolerance will be displayed just below the element you selected.

3. Move the cursor to position the geometrical tolerance and then click at the chosen location. The Geometrical Tolerance dialog box appears.



●

●

●

At this step, you can apply the parameter values of an existing geometric tolerance to the tolerance you are creating: to do this, simply select the existing geometric tolerance. If you have selected the Use style values to create new objects option in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Administration tab, the Geometrical Tolerance dialog box is prefilled with custom style values (as defined in the Standards Editor). In this case, Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette are disabled during the creation of the geometrical tolerance. On the other hand, if you have not selected this option, the Geometrical Tolerance dialog box is pre-filled with the last entered values (if any). In this case, Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette are active during the creation of the of the geometrical tolerance. You can reset the current style values in the Geometrical Tolerance dialog box at any time using the Reset button.

4. Select the Filter Symbol option to filter the available tolerance symbols according to the type of geometrical element you selected (if any). If you did not select any geometrical element, the tolerance symbols will not filtered. 5. Specify the tolerance type by clicking the Tolerance Symbol button and selecting the appropriate symbol. 6. Type the tolerance value in the Tolerance value field, adding symbols as needed. To do this, position the cursor at the proper location in the field, and click the Insert Symbol button to choose the appropriate symbol.



You can add symbols to the tolerance and reference value as well as to the upper and lower text. 7. Type the reference values in the Reference value fields, adding symbols as needed. 8. To add a new geometrical tolerance, click the Next line arrow button and repeat steps 4 to 5. 9. Type the upper and lower texts in the appropriate fields. You may also add symbols if you want to.

The geometric tolerance is updated as you define values for each field. 10. Click OK when you're done. The geometrical tolerance is created.

11. You can add an all-around symbol to the leader. To do this, select the geometrical tolerance, right-click the yellow manipulator on the arrow and select All Around from the contextual menu.



Specifying Leader Orientation You can orient the geometrical tolerance leader perpendicularly to the element to which it is associated (for example, if the leader is associated to a dimension, you can position the leader parallel to the dimension line and orthogonal to the extension line). For this, you have two different possibilities: ● Either go to Tools -> Options -> Drafting -> Annotation and Dress-up tab and check Activate snapping (SHIFT toggles). Then, click the Configure button and select either On orientation or Both. To orient directly the geometrical tolerance leader perpendicularly to the associated element, press the Shift key before clicking in the drawing to position the tolerance (see previous scenario, step 3). ●

Or go to Tools -> Options -> Drafting -> Annotation and Dress-up tab and check Geometrical tolerance in Annotation Creation -> Apply snapping to. The leader will be oriented perpendicularly to the geometry by default. In this case, pressing the Shift key will let you orient it differently.

Specifying Geometrical Tolerance Orientation To make the tolerance vertical, hold the ctrl key before clicking in the drawing to position the tolerance (previous scenario, step 3).



Modifying Geometrical Tolerances

Modifying Geometrical Tolerances This task shows you how to modify a geometrical tolerance. Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. Create a geometrical tolerance.

1. Double-click the geometrical tolerance you want to modify.

The Geometrical Tolerance dialog box is displayed.

You can reset the current style values in the Geometrical Tolerance dialog box at any time using the Reset button.


Modifying Geometrical Tolerances

2. Modify any desired value from the dialog box. 3. Click OK.

4. Click in the free space to validate the geometrical dimension modification.



Copying Geometrical Tolerances

Copying Geometrical Tolerances This task will show you how to copy an existing geometrical tolerance and then edit the content for creating a new one. 1. Click on the geometrical tolerance you want to copy. 2. Right-click and select the Copy option from the contextual menu. 3. Select the element to which you want the geometrical tolerance to be associated. 4. Right-click and select the Paste option on the contextual menu. 5. Move the copied geometrical tolerance to position it as desired. 6. Double-click the copied geometrical tolerance. 7. In the filter Symbols box, make sure that the desired option is activated. Select to display only those tolerance symbols generally considered appropriate for the type of geometrical element selected. Unselect it to display all symbols, regardless of the selected type of element. 8. Modify any of the values. After you enter a value, press Enter or Tab to move to the next field. The geometrical tolerance is updated as you define values for each field. 9. Click OK to confirm your operation and close the dialog box.



Creating Driving Dimensions

Creating Driving Dimensions This task shows you how to create dimensions that will drive associated constrained geometry. Go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimension and select Activate analysis display mode. Then, click the Types and colors button to define the characteristics that will be assigned to constrained geometry.

The Types and colors of dimensions dialog box lets you select the color you want to assign to driving dimensions. Select the color shown below, for example.

Click the Dimensions

icon from

the Dimensioning toolbar and create a dimension on the geometry previously selected. In this example, create a length dimension on a line.

1. Double-click the dimension.

2. Modify the dimension via the displayed Dimension Value dialog box. For example, enter 40 millimeter as the new length. This dimension will now drive the geometry.



If the Drive geometry option is selected, the double-clicked dimension becomes a constraint and behaves as a dimension constraint.

The geometry is updated in order to reflect the new driving dimension. Let's call it driven geometry. In addition, this geometry is assigned the characteristics previously defined in the Types and colors of dimensions dialog box via Tools -> Options. In this particular case, the driving dimension is visualized as follows:

You cannot create driving dimensions in the following cases: ● Between a generated element and an interactive element, horizontal and vertical dimensions are not available. If you double-click on the dimension, the Drive geometry option is deactivated. ●

●

Between an interactive element and a generated circle center, no type of dimensions is available. If you double-click on the dimension, Drive geometry option is deactivated: To bypass this problem, create a point that is concentric with the center of the circle and create the dimension between this new point and the other element. Between two elements (a generative one and an interactive one) that are not parallel, no type of dimensions is available. If you double-click on the dimension, Drive geometry option is deactivated:



To bypass this problem, create a point that will be coincident with line A and line B at the same time and create the dimension between this new point and the other element. ●

Between two semicircles (apart from dimensions between the semicircles centers). If you double-click on the dimension, the Drive geometry option is deactivated:



[ Back ] [ Up ]



Creating Associative Thread Dimensions This task will show you how to create associative thread dimensions. Open the thread.CATDrawing document.

1. Click the Thread Dimension from the icon Dimensioning toolbar (Dimensions sub-toolbar). 2. Select the thread to be dimensioned in the front view. The diameter dimension appears.

3. Click the Thread Dimension icon

.

4. Select the only one of the thread elements in the section view, two dimensions appear:

●

the thread diameter

●

the thread depth



In the top views you can modify threads dimensions orientation.

[ Back ] [ Up ]


Annotations

Annotations Annotation commands are documented in the Interactive Drafting user's guide. As such, the information detailed in this section is presented in an Interactive Drafting context.

Still, you can open the GenDrafting_part.CATDrawing document and thus manipulate annotations and dress-up elements in a Generative Drafting context.

In order to be consistent with the way commands have been grouped in toolbars and sub-toolbars, the following tasks are documented in the Manipulating Dimensions chapter: ●

Datum Feature Creation and Modification

●

Geometrical Tolerance Creation, Modification and Copy

See Before you begin to learn about important concepts, including setting text properties.

Before you begin You should be familiar with basic concepts such as setting the properties of a text (font style, size, justification, etc.), using default values, and specifying the position and/ or orientation of a text. Create a free text Create a text that either wraps or not, that is assigned an unlimited width text frame, even though this text may reach the frame boundary. Create an associated text Create a text which you want to be and remain associated to an existing element. Make an existing annotation associative At any time and once an annotation has been created, you can add a link between an annotation and another element.


Annotations

Create a text with a leader Create a text with a leader either in the free space or associated with an element. Add a leader to an existing annotation Add a leader to an annotation that was previously created. Handle annotation leaders Add or remove breakpoints, extremity or interruptions. Move and position leader breakpoints. Add frames and sub-frames to existing text Add a frame or a sub-frame to a text that was previously created. Replicate a text and attribute: Replicate text as well as the corresponding text attribute. Copy text graphical properties: Copy the text graphical properties of an annotation or element to other elements. Create a datum target: Create a datum target on a view. Modify a datum target: Modify a datum target by editing it in a dialog box. Create a balloon: Create a balloon using a dialog box. Creating an associative balloon on a generated product view Create associative balloons on views generated from a product. Modify a balloon Modify a balloon using a dialog box.


Annotations

Create a roughness symbol Create a roughness using a dialog box. Create a welding symbol Create a welding symbol using a dialog box. Create a geometry weld Create a geometry weld symbol. Modify annotation positioning Assign new positioning to existing annotations. Create/modify a table Create, edit and modify a table. Find/replace text Locate and then, if needed, replace strings of characters. Perform an advanced search Use the advanced search command. Query object links Query object links in a drawing. Adding attribute links to text Add one or more attribute links between text that was previously created. [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]


Before You Begin

Before You Begin Setting Text Properties This task explains how to set the properties of a text, such as font style, size, justification, etc. Text properties can be applied to text, dimension text, text with leader, balloon and datum target, as well as to text included in datum features and geometrical tolerances. You can set the properties of a text either before or after creating it. Create a text. 1. Choose View -> Toolbars, and select Text Properties.

The Text Properties

toolbar is displayed.

2. Select the text.

3. Choose the properties you want to apply to this text from the Text Properties toolbar. For instance, select Italic and Bold. The properties you chose are applied to the selected text. The options available in the Text properties toolbar are listed in the table below:

Option

Name Font Name Font Size Bold Italic

Changes the style of the text. Changes the size of the text. Note that this size cannot be inferior to 0.2 mm. Changes the weight of the text. Toggles between normal and heavy (bold). Changes the angle of the text. Toggles between normal and slanted (italic)

Underline

Adds a line under the text.

Strike Thru

Adds a line through the center of the text.

Overline

Adds a line above the text.

Superscript Subscript Left Justify


Description

Raises the text above the normal text line. Lowers the text below the normal text line. Aligns multiple lines of text to the left edge of the text frame.

Before You Begin

Centers multiple lines of text within the text frame. Aligns multiple lines of text to Right Justify the right edge of the text frame. Anchor point Changes the position of the point that connects the text to the drawing or to an element. Choices are as follows: ● Along the top of the text: left, center or right Center Justify

●

●

Frame

Along the vertical center of text: left, center or right Along the bottom of the text: left, center or right

Draws a single-line frame around the text. A variety of different shapes is available. You can choose to create each frame with either a variable or a fixed size. For a rectangular frame, for example, the icon represents the variablesize frame, and the icon (with the padlock) represents the fixed-size frame.

Specifying the Position and Orientation of a Text You can specify the position (x, y) and/ or orientation (angle) of a text. Create a text. 1. Choose View -> Toolbars, and select the Position and Orientation command. The Position and Orientation toolbar is displayed.


Before You Begin

2. Select the text for which you want to specify the position and/or orientation. 3. Enter the required values in the Position and Orientation toolbar. ● X: sets the horizontal position. ●

Y: sets the vertical position.

●

A: sets the orientation.

[ Up ] [ Next ]


Creating a Free Text

Creating a Free Text This task explains how to create a text, with possible line wrapping. This text is assigned a frame of unlimited width, even though it may reach the frame boundary. You can set the properties of a text (anchor point, font size, justification, etc.) either before or after creating it. You will learn how to perform the following operations: ● Creating a Free Text ●

Specifying Text Orientation

Creating a Free Text Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Text icon

from the Annotations toolbar.

2. Click where you want to insert the free text on the drawing. A green frame appears, as well as the Text Editor dialog box.

3. If you want to specify the horizontal boundary of the text, drag the frame to where you want to place the boundary. If you want the horizontal boundary to adjust to your text, proceed with the following step.



4. Type your text in the Text Editor dialog box.

The drawing is automatically updated with the text you are typing in the Text Editor dialog box.

●

●

You can copy and paste text from another application. Its layout and properties will not be preserved. You cannot copy complex objects (such as tables) from another application.

5. When you are done typing your text, click OK in the Text Editor dialog box, click anywhere on the drawing, or click any command. You can also click the Select icon : in this case, the text will remain selected so you can change its properties for example. You can now start setting the properties of the text you just created using the Text Properties toolbar. Although you can create a text in a view that is not up-to-date, you cannot associate it to geometry. If you try to do so, the following message will appear:




You can associate the text to an element and make it parallel to it. To do this, you can do the following: ● Go to Tools -> Options-> Drafting -> Annotations tab and check Text in Annotation Creation -> Apply snapping to. From then on, any text you create after having selected an element will be automatically associated to this element. OR ● When the above option is not activated, you can specify when you want to associate a text to an element. To do so, click the Text icon and then press the shift key while selecting the element you want the text to be associated to. You can then type your text. You can also make the text vertical. To do this, click the Text icon and then press the ctrl key while clicking in the drawing where you want to create your free text.



Creating an Associated Text

Creating an Associated Text This task shows you how to create a text which you want to be associated to an existing element. This text will remain associated with this element. You can set text properties either before or after you create the text. Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. Create two diameter dimensions, for example. 1. Click the Text icon

from the

Annotations toolbar. 2. Select the element to which you want to associate a text. Here, we will use a dimension. You can associate the text either to the dimension line or to the extension line by clicking the appropriate element. Click the dimension line as in our example. The green text frame is displayed as well as the Text Editor dialog box. 3. Enter the text to be created in the Text Editor dialog box or directly on the drawing. For example, enter "diameter".

4. Click in the free space or click the Select icon

to end the text creation.

5. If needed, select the dimension and move it to the desired location. The text remains associated to the dimension.


Creating an Associated Text

●

●

●

Note that the text is associative to the whole selected element. In other words, in the case of a dimension, if you move the dimension text exclusively, the associated text will not move accordingly.

When creating associated texts, pressing the SHIFT key lets you change the orientation of the text as regards the element to which it is associated. You can associate text to the following elements: Annotations: text, datum feature, datum target, balloon, GD&T, roughness symbol, weld symbols.

❍

❍

Dimensions

❍

2D elements: point, circle, ellipse, parabola, hyperbola.

❍

Generative edges [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]


Making an Existing Annotation Associative

Making an Existing Annotation Associative This task explains how, at any time and once an annotation has been created, you can add a link between an annotation and another element. You can set text properties either before or after you create the text.

Positional link Available for every annotation. Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. Create a text. 1. Click the Select icon

.

2. Select any part of the text (text itself, frame or leader). 3. Right click and select Positional Link->Create from the contextual menu.

4. Select the element to which you want the text to be linked. 5. Select the associated element and drag it in the drawing, the text follows the element. 6. Delete existing associativity using the same dialog but selecting the Delete option (Positional Link contextual menu).

Orientation link This functionality is available for text, text with leader and roughness symbol. 7. Right click on the text and select Orientation Link->Create from the contextual menu.


Making an Existing Annotation Associative

8. Select the element to which you want the text to be linked. 9. Select the linked element and modify its orientation, the text orientation is simultaneously modified.

Elements that are Text Associative ●

● ●

●

Annotations ❍ text ❍

datum feature

❍

datum target

❍

balloon

❍

GD&T

❍

roughness symbols

❍

weld symbols

Dimensions 2D elements ❍ points ❍

circles

❍

ellipse

❍

parabola

❍

hyperbola

Generative edges



Creating a Text With a Leader

Creating a Text With a Leader This task shows you how to create a text with a leader either in the free space or associated with an element. You can set text properties either before or after you create the text.

●

Creating a Text with a Leader

●

Specifying Leader Orientation

●


●

Elements that can be Assigned Text with a Leader

Creating a Text With a Leader Create a rectangle. Note that leader lines are displayed in either of the following ways based on the standard currently set in defining the sheet.

1. Click the Text With Leader icon

from the Annotations toolbar (Texts sub-

toolbar).



2. Click the point on the element you want the leader to begin (arrow end). A red frame appears. 3. Click in the free space to define a location for the text.

Both the red frame and the arrow end of the leader are now assigned white and yellow manipulators. 4. If needed, drag the frame and/or arrow to a new location. For example, drag the arrow to the right. At this step, you can also decide that you want the text to be wrapped (like when creating a free text).



The Text Editor dialog box is displayed. 5. Enter the text in the Text Editor dialog box or directly on the drawing.

6. If needed, re-position or modify the text.

7. To end the text creation, click again in free space or select a command icon.

The leader is associated with the element you selected. If you move either the text or the element, the leader stretches to maintain its association with the element.



If you change the element that is associated with the leader, between both the new element and the text with leader remains associative to each others. 8. Create a circle. 9. Move the text with a leader.

You can create a text in a view which is not up-to-date, but you cannot associate it to geometry or the following panel appears:

Specifying Leader Orientation



When creating a text with leader, you can orient the leader perpendicularly to the element to which it is associated. To do this, you have two different possibilities: ● Either go to Tools -> Options -> Drafting -> Annotation and Dress-up tab and check Activate snapping (SHIFT toggles). Then, click the Configure button and select either On orientation or Both. To orient directly the leader perpendicularly to the associated element, press the Shift key while clicking on the element to which you want to associate the text with leader (previous scenario, step 3). ●

Or go to Tools -> Options -> Drafting -> Annotation tab, and in Annotation Creation -> Apply snapping to, check Text with leader. The leader will be oriented perpendicularly to the geometry by default. In this case, pressing the Shift key will let you orient it differently.

Specifying Text Orientation When creating a text with leader, you can make the text vertical. To do this, hold the Ctrl key while clicking in the drawing to position the text (previous scenario, step 3). ●

●

You can also add a leader to existing text. To learn how to do this, refer to Adding a Leader to Existing Text. You can perform a number of operations on a leader. To learn more, refer to Editing Annotation Leaders.

Elements that can be Assigned Text with a Leader ●

●

2D elements: ❍ lines ❍

points

❍

circles

❍

curves

Generative Edges



Adding a Leader to an Existing Annotation

Adding a Leader to an Existing Annotation This task shows you how to add a leader to an annotation that was previously created. Leaders can be positioned freely, or using snapping (the leader is oriented perpendicular to the reference element). For the purpose of this scenario, you will learn how to add a leader to an existing text, but this functionality is available with other annotation types as well.

Go to Tools -> Options-> Drafting -> Mechanical Design -> Annotation tab . Make sure the Activate snapping (Shift toggles) option is selected. Then, click on the Configure button and select either On orientation or Both. Create a hexagon. Create an annotation, a free text for example.

1. Right-click the annotation to which you want to add a leader.

2. Select the Add Leader command that appears in the contextual menu.

3. You have two possibilities:

●

If you want to position the leader freely: Click where you want to position the leader head. The leader is created. You can then move it to the desired location using the mouse. You can position the leader breakpoint anywhere on the reference element, and snapping is not used.



●

If you want the leader to be oriented perpendicular to the reference element: Press the Shift key while clicking where you want to position the leader head. The leader is created: it is snapped, and oriented perpendicular to the element to which it is attached. Release the Shift key and the mouse.

To create as many leaders as required for an existing text, go to Tools -> Customize and create the Add Leader command in a separate toolbar. You will then be able to double-click the Add Leader command and click to locate the leader(s) to be created.



If several text elements are selected as you activate the Add Leader command, the selection is cleared and a message prompts you to select an annotation. If you modify the text associated with the leader, associativity between the text and the leader is kept.



Handling Annotation Leaders

Handling Annotation Leaders This task shows you how to handle annotation leaders, by performing such operations as adding or removing a breakpoint, an extremity or an interruption. You will also learn how to move and position leader breakpoints.

Depending on the type of annotation the leader is associated with, not all operations described in this section will be available.

Handling Leaders Create a text with a leader.

1. Right-click the yellow control point at the end of the leader. The leader's contextual menu is displayed.

2. Choose from the available options.



●

●

To add a breakpoint, select Add a Breakpoint.

To add an extremity to an existing breakpoint, rightclick on the breakpoint, select Add an extremity, and then click where you want to position the extremity.

You can add an extremity only in the case of a text or a welding symbol.

●

Then, to remove this breakpoint, right-click on the breakpoint and select Remove a Breakpoint.

Then, to remove this extremity, right-click on the additional extremity and select Remove Leader/ Extremity.

Clicking on the main leader extremity will remove the leader.

To add an interruption, select Add an Interruption and Then, to remove this interruption, right-click on then, on the leader, click the two points between the leader yellow control which you want to add the interruption. point and select Remove Interruptions.



Any existing interruption will be removed from the leader if you subsequently add or remove a breakpoint.

●

To remove the leader, select Remove Leader/Extremity.

●

To add an all around symbol, select All Around.

●

To modify the leader symbol shape, point to Symbol Shape. Then, select No Symbol if you do not want a symbol for the leader, or select the symbol you want from the available symbols.



You can remove the leader extremity symbol for all annotations.

3. You can also move the leader or any existing breakpoints by clicking a yellow control point and moving it using the mouse.


Handling Annotation Leaders ●

●

●

●

To move the annotation but not the leader, click the annotation and move it using the mouse.

To move the leader along with the annotation while making sure the leader keeps its original shape, select Rigid and then move the annotation.

This functionality is available for texts, welding symbols, 2D components, tables and geometrical tolerances, but not for other annotation types. This functionality also applies when rotating the annotation text using the Free Rotation icon

.



Moving and Positioning Leader Breakpoints You can move and position leaders breakpoints easily, for all types of annotations. Leader breakpoints are moved and positioned using snapping (the leader is oriented perpendicular to the reference element).

Go to Tools -> Options-> Drafting -> Mechanical Design -> Annotation tab . Make sure the Activate snapping (Shift toggles) option is selected. Then, click on the Configure button and select either On orientation or Both. Open the Move_Leaders.CATDrawing document. This document contains a text with leader and a balloon. Add a breakpoint to both annotations, as explained in the previous section.

1. Move the text leader breakpoint with the mouse. You can position the leader breakpoint anywhere, and snapping is not used.



2. Now, press the Shift key while moving the leader breakpoint with the mouse. The leader is snapped, and is positioned vertically or horizontally, or with the same orientation as the element to which it is attached.

3. Release the Shift key and the mouse when you are satisfied with the position of the leader. 4. Move the balloon leader breakpoint with the mouse. You can position the leader breakpoint anywhere, and snapping is not used.

5. Now, press the Shift key while moving the leader breakpoint with the mouse. The leader is snapped, and is positioned vertically or horizontally, which happens to be the same orientation as the element to which the leader is attached.

6. Release the Shift key and the mouse when you are satisfied with the position of the leader. Both leaders are now positioned properly.





Adding Frames or Sub-Frames

Adding Frames or Sub-Frames This function allows you to add frames and sub-frames to texts and texts with leader.

Create a free text.

1. Select the text you have created and click the Frame icon

in the Text Properties Toolbar. The Frames sub-

menu is displayed.

You can choose to create each frame with either a variable or a fixed size. For a rectangular frame, for example, the icon

●

●

represents the variable-size frame, and the icon

(with the padlock) represents the fixed-size frame.

Variable-size frames adapt to the text length, whereas fixed-size frames always remain as is, no matter what the text length is. So if you choose a fixed-size frame and the length of you text exceeds the frame size, then the text will extend beyond the frame.

Fixed frame sizes are defined in the standards.

2. Choose a frame in the menu.



3. Click on the frame to select it

4. Right-click on the text and in the contextual menu choose the add leader command and click in the free space to end the leader creation.

Zoom to move the leader round the text. 5. Right-click on the hanged point and select a mode in the contextual menu. The anchor points available will be dependent on your choice. Set the Standard Behavior Off. These anchor points allow you to move a leader around the text.

Standard Behavior is the default mode. Automatic Mode corresponds to the point 1 of Standard Behavior. Frames Anchors Table:



Type of frame Rectangle

Square

Standard Behavior OFF 1 2 3 o-------o-------o / \ 4 o o 5 \ / o-------o-------o

Standard Behavior ON o-------o-------o /

\

1 o

o 2 \

/ o-------o-------o

3 __o__

Circle Scored Circle

__o__

2 o | 1 o | 8 o

Set Fixed Support

o 4 | o 5 | o 6

/

\

| 1 o |

| o 2 | \

/

--o-7

Sym Part

--o--

Sym Set 3 o

o / \

/ \ Diamond

2 o / 1 o \ 8 o

o 4 \ o 5 / o 6

o

Left Flag

Left Oblong

o / \ o o / \ 1 o---------o 2

1 2 3 o-------o-------o | \ 4 o o 5 | / o-------o-------o 6 7 8 1 2 3 o-------o-------o / | 4 o o 5 \ | o-------o-------o 6 7 8

Ellipse

o-------o-------o | 1 o o 2 \ | o-------o-------o /

o-------o-------o

/ Oblong

o-------o-------o | \ 1 o o 2 | / o-------o-------o

1 2 3 o-------o-------o

Both Flag 4

\

o

/ o 5

\

/ o-------o-------o 6 7 8


o \ / o

2 o o 4 / \ 1 o----o----o 5 6

Right Oblong

/ o

/ \

Right Flag

o 2 \

3 o Triangle

\

1 o

\ / o 7

Nota

o

/

\

1 o

o 2 \

/ o-------o-------o


Sticking

1 o---------o 2

1 o---------o 2

3

Parallelogram

4 5 o-------o-------o / / 2 o o 6 / / o-------o-------o 1 8 7

o-------o-------o / o o / / o-------o-------o 1 2 /

6. Drag the leader hanged point to move it to the anchor number 8 (see the previous table, circle, Standard Behavior Off). 7. Select a part of the text, as an example "Te", for this: ● Double-click on the text to edit it, the Text Editor appears. ●

Select "Te" in the Text Editor or in the drawing.

8. Apply the Both Flag frame to the text.

You cannot use Sticking and Nota frames as sub-frames.



Replicating Text and Attribute

Replicating Text and Attribute This task shows you how to replicate text as well as the corresponding text attribute. Open the GenDrafting_part_02.CATPart document. Open the GenDrafting_part_03. CATDrawing document.

1. Click the hole to be assigned text on the part. For example, on GenDrafting_part_02. CATPart, select Hole.1. 2. Click the CATDrawing (GenDrafting_part_03. CATDrawing) and click the Replicate icon from the Annotations toolbar (Texts sub-toolbar).

3. Select the text to be replicated. The new replicated text automatically appears under the cursor. 4. Click where you want the new text to be positioned. The hole diameter automatically corresponds to the diameter of Hole1 you selected on the part.


Replicating Text and Attribute

5. If needed, add a text leader to the new text.



Copying Graphic Properties

Copying Graphic Properties This task shows you how to copy the graphic properties of a text element to existing texts. This is true for any type of Interactive Drafting element. In this task, we will take free text as an example. Create free texts. 1. Multi-select the free texts to be modified graphically speaking.

2. Click the Copy Object Format icon

from the Graphic Properties toolbar.

3. Select the text to be used as a graphical reference for selected texts.


Copying Graphic Properties

The graphical properties assigned to the text used as a reference are now copied onto the multi-selected free texts to be modified.



Creating a Datum Target

Creating a Datum Target This task will show you how to create a datum target on a right projection view. You can set text properties either before or after you create the datum target. Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Datum Target icon from the Annotations toolbar (Texts sub-toolbar).

2. Select the attachment point of the datum target leader. 3. Select a point to be used to position the datum target (anchor point).

The Datum Target Creation dialog box is displayed. 4. Enter the required field. For example, 1 and A.

click this button to define that the datum target informs on the


Creating a Datum Target

diameter of the selected element. 5. Click OK. The datum target is created.

The character string that is edited in the Datum Target Creation dialog box is simultaneously previewed on the drawing.



Modifying a Datum Target

Modifying a Datum Target This task shows you how to modify a datum target by editing it. Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. Create a datum target.

1. Double-click the datum target you want to modify.

The Datum Target Modification dialog box is displayed. 2. Modify any of the datum target values. For example, enter B instead of A. 3. Click OK.

4. Click in the free space or select another icon. The datum target is modified.


Modifying a Datum Target



Creating a Balloon

Creating a Balloon This task will show you how to create a balloon. You can set text properties either before or after you create the text. Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document.

1. Click the Balloon icon

from the

Annotations toolbar (Text sub-toolbar).

2. Select an element. For example, select the bottom line of the rectangle. 3. Click to define the balloon anchor point.

The Balloon Creation dialog box appears, with the value 1 is pre-entered in the field.

4. You can enter another string or value as needed. For the purpose of this exercise, leave the pre-entered value as is.

5. Click OK.

●

●

The value that is edited in the Balloon Creation dialog box is simultaneously previewed on the drawing. When you create more than one balloon, the value of this balloon is automatically incremented.


Creating a Balloon



Creating Associative Balloons on Generated Product Views

Creating Associative Balloons on Generated Product Views This task will show you how to create associative balloons on views generated from a product. Open the Product_Balloon.CATProduct document. On this CATProduct document, Product Structure subproducts have already been assigned numbers (Generate Numbering icon). For more details, see the Product Structure User's Guide.

1. Go to the Generative Drafting workbench by opening Product_Balloon.CATDrawing document.

2. Click the Balloon icon

from the Annotations

toolbar (Texts sub-toolbar).


Creating Associative Balloons on Generated Product Views

3. Go over one of the part with your cursor. All the edges on all the views extracted from the part are highlighted.

4. Create a balloon by selecting an edge. The number of the balloon corresponds to the number of the sub-product created in the product which the views were generated from. In this particular example, even though the balloon you are creating is the first one, it is assigned number four as it is applied to sub-product number four.

Note that if you modify the numbering in the product and then regenerate the product, the balloon modification will be applied to the generated views only after you perform a view update.



Modifying a Balloon

Modifying a Balloon This task shows you how to modify a balloon. Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. Create a balloon.

1. Right-click the balloon you want to modify.

2. From the contextual menu, select Properties. 3. In the Properties dialog box, click the Text tab.

4. You will now define the balloon frame properties from the Frame drop-down list. By default, balloons are assigned a variable-size circle

which adapts to the balloon

text length. You have other options: ●

You can display the balloon without a frame by selecting the None icon

●

You can assign a fixed-size frame to the balloon by selecting the fixed-size Circle icon

.

.

For more information about fixed-sized frames, refer to Adding frames or sub-frames. For the purpose of this exercise, select the fixed-size Circle icon


.

Modifying a Balloon

5. Click OK to validate and close the Properties dialog box. The balloon size is modified.

6. Now, double-click the balloon. The Balloon Modification dialog box is displayed. The Autofit option is active when the size of the balloon frame is fixed.

7. Modify the balloon value. 8. Select the Autofit option to adapt the size of the text to that of the balloon frame.


Modifying a Balloon

9. Click OK. The text is enlarged to fit within the balloon frame.

In the case of large texts, the Autofit option reduces the text size. 10. You can also modify the anchor point and thereby the position of the balloon.



Creating a Roughness Symbol

Creating a Roughness Symbol This task will show you how to create a roughness symbol. Open the Roughness.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Roughness Symbol icon

from the Annotations toolbar.

2. Select the attachment point of the roughness symbol. The roughness symbol position and orientation will be associative to this point.

The Roughness Symbol dialog box is displayed. The fields available in the Roughness Symbol dialog box depend on the standard used by the drawing, as defined by the administrator.





Symbols Definition Surface texture Surface texture and all surfaces around Basic All surfaces around Lay approximately parallel to the line representing the surface Lay approximately perpendicular to the line representing the surface Lay angular in both directions Lay multidirectional. Lay approximately circular Lay approximately radial Lay particulate, non-directional, or protuberant Basic surface texture

Material removal by machining is required

Material removal by machining is prohibited.

3. Enter the required values in the various field(s). 4. Click OK. The roughness symbol is created.



5. If needed, modify the roughness symbol position by dragging it to the required location.

●

●

●

●

If you have selected the Use style values to create new objects option in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Administration tab, the Roughness Symbol dialog box is pre-filled with custom style values (as defined in the Standards Editor). In this case, Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette are disabled during the creation of the roughness symbol. On the other hand, if you have not selected this option, the Roughness Symbol dialog box is pre-filled with the last entered values (if any). In this case, Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette are active during the creation of the of the roughness symbol. If you have selected the Use style values to create new objects option, you can reset the current style values in the Roughness Symbol Editor dialog box at any time using the Reset button. At any time, you can modify the roughness symbol. For this, double-click the roughness symbol to be modified and enter the desired modifications in the displayed Roughness Symbol dialog box (for orientation modification, use the Invert switch button). When this is not already the case, you can link roughness symbol position and orientation to another element, see Making an Existing Annotation Associative.



Creating a Welding Symbol

Creating a Welding Symbol This task will show you how to create a welding symbol. You can set text properties either before or after you create the text. Welding symbols Square butt weld Singe V butt weld Single bevel butt weld Flare V butt weld Flare bevel butt weld Single U butt weld Single J butt weld Fillet weld Spot weld Back weld Steep-flanked single-bevel butt weld Steep-flanked single-V weld Plug weld Removable backing strip used Permanent backing strip used Surfacing weld V flare weld Spot weld



Complementary symbols Weld with flat face Weld with convex face Weld with concave face Flush finished weld Fillet weld with smooth blended face Finish symbols C finish symbol F finish symbol G finish symbol H finish symbol M finish symbol R finish symbol Complementary indications Field weld Weld-all-around Weld text side (up or down) Indent line side (up or down) Weld tail Reference Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Welding Symbol icon

from

the Annotations toolbar (Symbols subtoolbar).



2. Select an element or click in the free space to position the anchor point of the welding symbol, and then click to validate. The welding leader will appear. 3. Move the cursor to position the welding symbol and then click at the chosen location. The Welding creation dialog box is displayed.

4. Type the desired values in the upper and/or lower field(s). 5. Click the symbol buttons to choose the welding symbol, complementary symbols and/or finish symbols. The welding symbols available depend on your standard. 6. If you want to add complementary indications like a field weld or a weld tail, for example, click the appropriate button.



7. Click OK. The welding symbol is created.

8. If needed, modify the welding symbol position by dragging it to the required location. 9. Double-click on the welding symbol to edit it, and change the weld text side for example by clicking the Up/Down switch button.



●

●

●

●

●

If you have selected the Use style values to create new objects option in Tools > Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Administration tab, the Welding creation dialog box is pre-filled with custom style values (as defined in the Standards Editor). In this case, Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette are disabled during the creation of the welding symbol. On the other hand, if you have not selected this option, the Welding creation dialog box is pre-filled with the last entered values (if any). In this case, Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette are active during the creation of the of the welding symbol. You can reset the current style values in the Welding creation dialog box at any time using the Reset button. You can close the tail (reference) using a rectangle variable-size frame

.

At any time, you can modify the welding symbol. To do this, double-click the welding symbol to be modified and enter the modifications in the displayed dialog box. You can import a plain text file (.txt) to use as a reference (specification, process or other) by clicking the Import File button.



Creating a Geometry Weld

Creating a Geometry Weld This task will show you how to create a geometry weld. Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Weld icon

from the Annotations toolbar (Symbols sub-toolbar).

2. Select a first element. For example, a line. 3. Select a second element. For example, another line. The geometry default weld symbol automatically appears on the drawing.

The Welding Editor dialog box is displayed. 4. If needed, modify the geometry welding symbol. For example, modify the thickness from ten to five millimeters.



5. If needed, modify the type of the geometry welding symbol by selecting the Change Type option

from the Welding Editor dialog box.

6. Click OK.

The geometry welding symbol is created.

The area fill corresponding to the geometry weld cannot be modified.





Modifying Annotation Positioning

Modifying Annotation Positioning This task will show you how to assign new positioning to existing annotations. You can also modify the position of the views using the same dialog. Open the IntDrafting_Annotations_Positioning.CATDrawing document. 1. Multi-select the annotations to be newly positioned. In this example, multi-select text. 2. Select the Tools -> Positioning -> Element Positioning command from the menu bar. The Positioning dialog box appears:

3. Select the Align to top option

.



Align to the left The reference text is the text, among the selected texts, that is positioned the most at the left. The text anchor point is moved to the left (for example, from the bottom center to the bottom left). The texts are aligned vertically relatively to the reference text origin point (same x abscissa as for the reference text).

Align to the center The reference text is positioned at the middle of both left and right extremity points. The text anchor point is moved to the center (for example, from the top left to the top center). The texts are aligned vertically relatively to the reference text origin point (same x abscissa as for the reference text).

Align to the right The reference text is the text, among the selected texts, that is positioned the most at the right. The text anchor point is moved to the right (for example, from the middle center to the middle right). The texts are aligned vertically relatively to the reference text origin point (same x abscissa as for the reference text).

Align to the top The reference text is the text, among the selected texts, that is positioned the most at the top. The text anchor point is moved to the top (for example, from the bottom left to the top left). The texts are aligned horizontally relatively to the reference text origin point (same y coordinate as for the reference text).

Align to the middle The reference text is positioned at the middle of both top and bottom extremity points. The selected texts are assigned the middle attribute as text origin (for example, from the



top left to the middle left). The texts are aligned horizontally relatively to the reference text origin point (same y coordinate as for the reference text).

Align to the bottom The reference text is the text, among the selected texts, that is positioned the most at the bottom. The text anchor point is moved to the bottom (for example, from the top left to the bottom left). The texts are aligned horizontally relatively to the reference text origin point (same y coordinate as for the reference text).

4. Select the Space from left to right option

and set the Space value to 30mm.

Note that when you select a Space option, the modification does not appear similarly on the drawing. This modification only appears when you enter the new Space value in the Positioning dialog box or when you select a Space value.

5. Select the Distribute horizontally option

.



6. Select the Move vertically to top option

and set the Move value to -10mm.

Note that when you select a Move option, the modification does not appear similarly on the drawing. This is only the case once you enter the new Move value in the Positioning dialog box or when you select a spacing option.



Creating/Modifying a Table

Creating/Modifying a Table This task shows you how to create and edit a table. In this table, you can add text, insert columns, rows, merges cells, invert lines, invert columns, switch lines and columns, and insert views. You can also split a table, import a table, and insert a view in a table. Choose a task: ● creating a table, ●

editing and modifying a table,

●

splitting a table,

●

importing a table,

●

inserting a view in table.

Creating a table Create a new sheet and a new view. 1. Click the Table icon

to launch the command.

2. Click a point in the drawing to choose the table position. The table cannot be associative, do not select an element in the drawing to make the table associative. 3. The following panel allows you to set the number of columns and rows you want for the table.



●

The line height corresponds to the height of a string.

●

The line width corresponds to 5 times a string height.

4. Click ok to validate the creation.

Editing and modifying a table 5. Click on the table to select it and drag it to another position. 6. Double-click the table to edit it:

●

To select a column, click just above the column when the symbol

●

To select a line, click on the left of the row

●

To leave edition, click outside the table.

appears.

.

When the table is in edition mode, you cannot move it anymore. 7. Right-click on the corner of the frame around the table to access the general contextual menu.



This contextual menu allows you to: ● invert columns, ●

invert rows,

●

turn rows into columns and columns into rows,

●

fit the text in the cells by automatically defining the optimal cell size,

●

extend the table by adding columns and/or rows to it.

8. Choose Invert rows in the contextual menu. Rows are inverted, i.e., the last row becomes the first one, the first row becomes the last one, etc.



9. Choose Invert Columns in the contextual menu. Columns are inverted.

10. Select Invert Columns / Rows in the contextual menu. Rows and Columns are inverted:

11. Select a column and right-click to get the contextual menu, it allows you to: ● Insert a column, ●

Delete a column,

●

Clear the content of a column,

●

Modify the size of a column: ❍ either set a new column size, ❍

or autofit the size, i.e. fit the text in the cells by automatically defining the optimal cell size.



Choose to autofit the column size, the following dialog box appears:

Set the column width to a new value value and click OK to validate. The same functionalities are available for rows. 12. Select two cells and right-click them, then choose Merge in the contextual menu. 13. Then select the new cell formed by the two cells you have merged and choose Unmerge to split them in two cells again. 14. Double-click on the text of a cell. The Text Editor appears: modify the text and click OK to validate.

15. To choose vertical and horizontal text alignment, use the Anchor point tool Align the text of a cell on the right using

.


.


Splitting a table Open the Split_tables.CATDrawing document. It contains a table that you will split into several tables.

1. Right-click the table and choose Split Table from the contextual menu. The Table Split dialog box appears.



It contains the following options: ● Max. number of rows: if you want to split the table so that each new table contains a maximum number of rows, select this option and enter the wanted number of rows in the associated field. ●

Max. height: if you want to split the table so that each new table has a maximum height, select this option and enter the wanted height in the associated field.

●

Vertical: check this option to create the new tables one below the other.

●

Horizontal: check this option to position the new tables one next to the other.

●

Distance: indicate the distance you want between each new table.

●

Duplicate first row: check this option if you want to duplicate the first row in each new table.

2. Select Max. number of rows, and enter 5 in the corresponding field. 3. Select Vertical. 4. In the Distance field, type 5 mm. 5. Select Duplicate first line. 6. Click OK. The table is split into several tables, according to the criteria you specified.

Importing a table http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driugbt0736.htm (7 of 10)10/20/2004 5:34:42 PM


You can import a table (only .csv). 1. Click the Import Table icon

and select the table you want to import.

Inserting a view a in table Open the GenDrafting_part.CATDrawing file. Create a table in the front views.



1. Double-click on the table to edit it and right-click in the cell you want to fill. Select Insert Object.

2. Choose the view you want to insert by clicking the view in the drawing or in the tree. Choose the Top view:



The top view is inserted in the table, and it is resized so as to fit the cell. You can resize the cell if you want to enlarge the view in the table.

●

You cannot select the view containing the table,

●

The view must be in the same drawing.

●

If you modify the 3D part and update the drawing, the view in the table will be updated as well.



Finding and Replacing Text

Finding And Replacing Text This task explains first how to locate a string of characters and then how to replace it. Strings can be found and replaced in the following elements: ● balloons ●

datum features

●

datum targets

●

dimensions

●

texts

Open the IntDrafting_Text_Replace.CATDrawing document.

1. Select the Edit->Find item from the menu bar. The Find dialog box appears. 2. Select any of the optional settings. For example, enter First as the Find what text. 3. Select

.

The following message appears in the dialog box: Searching All Current Sheet Views. If you previously selected a given number of sheets or elements in the document, the message will be Searching All Current Elements. The first instance found is red colored.



4. If needed, select

to search

for other instances.

5. Select

.

The Replace dialog box now appears. 6. Enter the text you want to use as replacement text and select again. For example, enter Second as the Replace with text. To replace all instances of the text, select . You can also match case, find whole words only or re-frame the window. 7. Select

.

Note that you can directly access the Replace dialog box by selecting the Edit>Replace item from the menu bar.





Performing an Advanced Search

Performing an Advanced Search This task will show you how to use the advanced search command in the Drafting workbench. First, refer to the Infrastructure User's Guide to learn more about advanced search. 1. Select the Edit->Search... command then click the Advanced tab:

2. Choose Drafting as the workbench. Any element type has the following attributes: ● Name: indicate the name of the searched element ●

Color: select a color from the color chooser or use the color of an existing element

●

Set: a selection set indicating a numeric value with the corresponding unit of measure.

Some elements have additional types:


Performing an Advanced Search

Type

Additional attributes

Value to select or to key in

Balloon

Part name

name of the searched element

Datum Feature

Reference name


Datum Target

Reference name


Size

size indicated in the searched element

Type

type of dimension (angle, diameter, radius, length, etc.) searched

value

dimension value searched

Dimension

Not associative on 3D Yes/No

Geometrical tolerance

Text

Not updateable

Yes/No

Fake

Yes/No

Driving dimension

Yes/No

True

Yes/No

value

tolerance value searched

type

tolerance type (circularity, concentricity, flatness, parallelism, etc.) searched

having attribute links

Yes/No

text string

text string searched

3. Select an operating sign in the first combo box. 4. Select (if there is a combo box) or key in the value you are looking for.



Querying Object Links

Querying Annotation Links This task explains how to query annotation links in a drawing (this lets you know what object an annotation is linked to) and how to zoom on the linked object. Open the query_link.CATDrawing document. 1. Right-click on the text "Front view Scale: 1:1" and select Query Object Links in the contextual menu.

2. The Query Link Panel appears:


Querying Object Links

It displays the linked objects name and specifications. In our example, the view name and scale are linked to the front view.

Zoom on the linked object 3. In the Panel, check Re-frame the window and select the linked object you want to zoom. As an example, select ViewMakeUp.3

The object is zoomed.

[ Back ] [ Up ]


Dress-Up Elements

Dress-Up Elements Dress-up commands are documented in the Interactive Drafting user's guide. As such, the information detailed in this section is presented in an Interactive Drafting context.

Still, you can open the GenDrafting_part.CATDrawing document and thus manipulate annotations and dress-up elements in a Generative Drafting context.

This dress-up will be associative to the elements created from a part or an assembly. When created, these elements are associated with a view.

Note that if you delete generated center lines, threads or axis lines, you will NOT be able to generate them again (by updating the drawing). It is impossible to restore generated center lines, threads or axis lines that have been deleted.

Create center lines (no reference): Apply a center line to one or more circles. Create center lines (reference): Apply a center line to one or more circles with respect to a reference (linear or circular). Modify center lines: Modify one or more center lines at one or more end(s) of this/these center lines. Create threads (no reference): Create a thread without a reference. Create threads (reference): Create a thread with a reference, either circular (circle or point) or linear (line). Create axis lines: Create an axis line by selecting lines.


Dress-Up Elements

Create axis lines and center lines: Create an axis line by selecting lines. Create an area-fill: Create an area fill, i.e. a closed area on which you will then apply graphical dress-up elements called patterns (these can be hatching, dotting or coloring). Patterns can be applied to area fills created from both sketched and generated elements. Create arrows: Create an arrow.



Creating Center Lines (No Reference)

Creating Center Lines (No Reference) This task will show you how to apply a pair of center lines to a circle or an ellipse. Open the Brackets_views06.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Center Line icon

from the Dressup toolbar (Axis and Threads sub-

toolbar).

2. Select a circle. Center lines are automatically applied to the circle

. 3. Click in the drawing to confirm the creation and select the center lines. 4. Use manipulators to modify center lines size. ●

●

You can apply this scenario to an ellipse. When creating a center line on a generative view, a message will be displayed if the center line cannot be associative to the 3D.

[ Up ] [ Next ]


Creating Center Lines (Reference)

Creating Center Lines (Reference) This task will show you how to apply a pair of center lines to a circle or an ellipse with respect to a reference (linear or circular). Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Center Line with Reference icon

from

the Dressup toolbar (Axis and Threads sub-toolbar). You can multi-select circles before you enter the command to create center lines for all selected circles.

2. Select the circle to be applied a pair of center lines. 3. Select the reference line. The center line created is associative with the reference line.

You can create a pair of center lines according to a circular reference (a point or a circle): 4. Click the Center Line with Reference icon

from

the Dressup toolbar (Axis and Threads sub-toolbar). You can multi-select circles before you enter the command and thereby apply center lines to the selected circles.

5. Select the circle to be applied a pair of center lines. 6. Select the reference circle. The pair of center lines created is associative with the reference circle type element.


Creating Center Lines (Reference)

You cannot apply this scenario to an ellipse.

When creating a center line on a generative view, a message will be displayed if the center line cannot be associative to the 3D. In this case, the center line is neither linked to the 3D nor to 2D drawing elements. For example, a non-associative center line with a reference line will not be updated when the reference line is moved.



Modifying Center Lines

Modifying Center Lines This task will show you how to modify a pair of center lines at one or more end(s) of this/these center lines. The same method applies to axis lines. Open the Brackets_views06.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the center line. Red end points appear.

2. Select any end point and drag to move all the center line extremities to a new position.


Modifying Center Lines

3. Press the Ctrl key while selecting any end point and drag the selected extremity to a new position.

Multi-selection can be performed to modify center lines. You can also modify the center line using the contextual menu (Properties) and displayed Properties dialog box (Graphic tab).



Creating Threads (No Reference)

Creating Threads (No Reference) This task will show you how to create a thread without a reference. In this particular case, you will apply a thread to a hole. Open the Brackets_views06.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Drawing window, and click the Thread icon

from the Dress-up toolbar

(Axis and Threads sub-toolbar).

You can also multi-select holes before clicking the Thread icon

.

Activating this command displays two options in the Tools Palette which is automatically displayed: ●

The Tap type option

●

The Thread type option

, which is activated by default. .

2. Select the Thread type option

.

3. Select the hole (or circle) to which you want to apply a thread. The thread is created.


Creating Threads (No Reference)

4. Select an axis line manipulator and drag it along a direction. Thread axis lines are modified symmetrically. If you want to move only one axis line, hold on the Ctrl key while you are dragging the manipulator. ●

●

The thread that appears on the hole is assigned a standard radius and representation (compliant with the selected standard). When creating a thread on a generative view, a message will be displayed if the thread cannot be associative to the 3D.



Creating Threads (Reference)

Creating Threads (Reference) This task shows you how to create a thread with a reference, either circular (circle or point) or linear (line). In this particular case, you will apply a thread to a hole with a line as reference. Open the Brackets_views06.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Drawing window, and click the Thread with Reference icon from the Dress-up toolbar (Axis and Threads sub-toolbar). You can multi-select holes before you enter the command and then apply center lines to the selected holes. Activating this command displays two options in the Tools Palette: ●

●

The Reference Tap type option activated by default. The Reference Thread type option

, which is

.

2. Select the Reference Thread type option

.

3. Select a reference line. The thread is created according to this reference.

4. Select a manipulator and drag it along a direction. Thread axis lines are modified symmetrically. If you want to move only one axis line, hold on the Ctrl key while you are dragging the manipulator.

When creating a thread on a generative view, a message will be displayed if the center line cannot be associative to the 3D. In this case, the thread is neither linked to the 3D nor to 2D drawing elements. For example, a non-associative thread with a reference line will not be updated when the reference line is moved.


Creating Threads (Reference)



Creating Axis Lines

Creating Axis Lines This task will show you how to create an axis line. Open the Brackets_views07.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Drawing window, and click the Axis Line icon

from the Dressup

toolbar (Axis and Threads toolbar).

2. Select two lines.

The axis line is created

●

If needed, you can select two non-parallel lines that are not colinear.

●

Both in the case of center lines and axis lines, a default overrun is created.


Creating Axis Lines

●

●

When creating an axis line on a generative view, a message will be displayed if the axis line cannot be associative to the 3D. You can create axis lines between symbolic fillet edges or fillet representation on generative views. Note that these axis lines will not be associative (a message will be displayed).

If you need to modify an axis line, please refer to Modifying a center line as the method is similar. Note that multi-selection can be performed when modifying axis lines.



Creating Axis Lines and Center Lines

Creating Axis Lines and Center Lines This task will show you how to create simultaneously axis and center lines on several circles. Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Drawing window, and click the Axis Line and Center Line icon

from

the Dressup toolbar (Axis and Threads toolbar).

2. Select two circles.

The axes and center lines are created.

4. Select an axis line manipulator and drag it along a direction. Thread axis lines are modified symmetrically. If you want to move only one axis line, hold on the Ctrl key while you are dragging the manipulator.


Creating Axis Lines and Center Lines

When creating axes and center lines on a generative view, a message will be displayed if axes and center line cannot be associative to the 3D.



Creating an Area Fill

Creating an Area Fill An area fill is a closed area on which you then apply graphical dress-up element called patterns (these can be hatching, dotting or coloring). You can create area fills on the following elements:

●

sketched elements,

●

generated elements

●

part-sketched, part-generated elements

In this task, you will learn how to create an area fill on a drawing containing a mix of sketched and generated elements. Open the GenDrafting_Area_Fill.CATDrawing document. This drawing is a generated one.

Define your area fill profile by creating lines so that your drawing looks like the figure shown here. In this example, sketched elements (the ones you create) are selected (they are shown in red), and generated elements are shown in black. The area fill profile will therefore consist of both sketched and generated elements. You do not need to activate the view in which you are going to create an area fill.

1. In the Graphic Properties toolbar, click the down arrow besides the Pattern

2. In the Pattern dialog box, select a pattern for your area fill and click OK. 3. Click Insert -> Dress Up -> Area Fill. OR

Click the Area Fill icon

from the Dress Up toolbar.


icon.


The Area Detection dialog box appears.

4. Click the Automatic option (the other option is described in the remarks section below) and then click inside the area for which you just defined the profile, under the line which represents the fillet edge.

The software automatically detects the area to fill based on where you clicked and fills this area with the selected pattern. The Areas to Fill dialog box disappears.

A few remarks Area to Fill dialog box The two options available in the Area to Fill dialog box are described below. You can specify the area you want to fill before or after choosing the option in the Area to Fill dialog box. For each option, examples illustrate what kind of area fill you will get depending on where you click. Note where the cursor is located on the figures. ● Automatic automatically detects the area to fill based on where you click: just click inside the area you want to fill.

If you click in this area:


You get this area fill:


●

With profile selection lets you specify the area to fill: select all the 2D elements that make up the boundary of the area you want to fill, and then click inside this area. As you select elements on a view, intersection symbols (stars) appear where elements intersect. This enables you to know where the profile is open: in this case, intersection symbols do not appear. As you cannot apply an area fill to an open profile, make sure all elements intersect.

If you select these elements:


You get this area fill:


Miscellaneous remarks about applying area fills ●

●

●

Whichever option you choose in the Areas to Fill dialog box, make sure the profile you select is closed, i. e. that all elements that make up its boundary intersect. An error message will appear if you select a profile which is not closed. When you create an area fill on sketched elements, or on part-sketched, part-generated elements, extra sketched elements are added over the generated elements which make up the boundaries of the area fill. Also, coincidence constraints are created between the original generated elements and the added sketched elements. On generated drawings, the area fill is not associative with the 3D part. If you modify the original 3D part and then update the generated drawing, the area fill will not be changed.

●

Select elements carefully: the area will be filled according to the elements you selected.

●

If you apply modifications to the filled area, the pattern will be modified accordingly.

●

If you create text in a filled area, the background of the text will be blanked as shown here.

●

With hatching or dotting patterns, the spacing between each hatch or dot is sometimes larger than the area to fill. This makes it impossible to display the pattern properly. In such a case, the area fill contour is made bold and is turned into the same color as the pattern color. This enables you to identify items with area fills even if the pattern is not visible. The figures below illustrate what the sketched element will look like in such a case.

What you have before applying the pattern:

What you get if the pattern cannot be displayed:





Creating Arrows

Creating Arrows This task will show you how to create an arrow. For the purpose of this exercise, you will use an arrow to illustrate the kind of hole you want to apply to a circle. Open the Brackets_views06.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Drawing window, and select Insert->Dress Up->Arrow from the menu bar.

2. Click a point or select an object to define the arrow starting point (the tail). For example, select a circle. 3. Click another point or select another object to define the arrow extremity (the head). The arrow is created.

The arrow and the selected object are associative.


Creating Arrows

●

●

To modify the position of the arrow, click the arrow and use the yellow manipulators to drag it to its new location.

To modify the general appearance of the arrow, either click the arrow and then use the Graphic Properties toolbar, or right-click the arrow and then use the Properties dialog box (select Properties and click the Graphic tab).

4. You will now add a breakpoint to the arrow. Select it and right-click on a yellow manipulator. A contextual menu appears.


Creating Arrows

5. Select Add a Breakpoint. A breakpoint is added to the arrow; you can drag it to change the arrow path.


Creating Arrows

6. You will now choose a symbol for the arrow tail. To do this, right-click on the yellow tail manipulator. 7. In the contextual menu, point to Symbol Shape and select a symbol, Filled Circle for example.

The symbol you choose now appears on the arrow tail. You can also change the symbol used for the arrow head by repeating steps 6 and 7.


Creating Arrows

8. You will now create an interruption on the arrow tail. Right-click on the yellow tail manipulator again. 9. In the contextual menu, select Add an Interruption. An interruption is added to the arrow.

● ●

You cannot add another extremity to an arrow. Arrow angle and length are defined by standards. For more information, see Dimension Parameters.


Creating Arrows

[ Back ] [ Up ]


Properties

Properties This section discusses how to quickly access and edit information on 2D geometry, dress-up elements, annotations and dimensions in a single dialog box, provided you use the Edit>Properties contextual command. The data you can access (tabs) depends on the element you select. Note that clicking the More switch gives you access to more tabs. The tasks described in this section are listed below.

Editing view properties Access and, if needed, edit view properties. Editing 2D geometry feature properties: Access and, if needed, edit information on 2D geometry features (name and stamp). Editing 2D element graphic properties: Access and, if needed, edit graphic properties. Editing annotation font properties: Access and, if needed, edit annotation font properties. Editing text properties: Access and, if needed, modify text color, position and/or orientation. Editing dimension text properties: Access and, if needed, edit dimension text properties. Editing dimension value properties: Access and, if needed, edit dimension value properties. Editing dimension tolerance properties: Access and, if needed, edit dimension tolerance properties. Editing dimension extension line properties: Access and, if needed, edit dimension extension line properties.


Properties

Editing dimension line properties: Access and, if needed, edit information on dimension line properties. Editing 2D component instance properties: Access and, if needed, edit 2D component instance properties.



Editing View Properties

Editing View Properties This task explains how to edit view properties. Open the PointSketch.CATDrawing document. 1. Right-click the front view and select properties. Choose the View tab. You can notice that are number of options are disabled, as they apply to generative views only. 2. Choose your options.

Visualization and behavior ●

Display view frame: shows/hides the view frame,

●

Lock view: locks the view so that it cannot be modified anymore.

●

Visual clipping: lets you reframe a view so as to display only part of it.

Scale and Orientation ●

Angle: defines the angle between the view and the sheet,

●

Scale: defines the scale of the view.



View Name Allows you to modify the name of the view (or of the 2D component when pertinent), and to enter a prefix, an ID or a suffix. Among other things, you can create a formula for the view name.

Properties available on Generative Views The properties described below apply to generative views only. They will be active in a Generative Drafting context.

Dress-up Specifies the dress-up elements that should be displayed in the view: ● Hidden lines ●

Center line

●

3D spec

●

3D Colors

●

Axis

●

Thread

●

Fillets: you can choose to view Boundaries, Symbolic, Original Edges, Projected Original Edges.



Boundaries: thin lines, representing the mathematical limits of the fillets. Boundaries will not be projected if they correspond to two faces which are continuous in curvature. They will be projected only if they correspond to a smooth edge which is situated between two faces whose curvature radii vary. This mode will be used automatically to represent a connection between two faces which are not joined by a fillet, no matter what option you select.

Symbolic Original edges, projected in a direction that is normal to each corresponding surface.

Approximated Original Edges Original edges, at the intersection of the two surfaces joined by the fillet.

Projected Original Edges Original edges, projected on fillet surfaces in the direction of the view projection.

This projection mode is equivalent to the CATIA V4 fillet projection mode.



●

3D Points: projects points from 3D (no construction elements). You can choose from the following options: 3D symbol inheritance: keeps the symbol from the 3D. Symbol: displays the symbol you choose from the drop-down list.

●

3D Wireframe: displays both the wireframe and the geometry on generated views. You can choose whether projected 3D wireframe can be hidden or is always visible: Can be hidden: in some cases, depending on the projection angle, part or all of 3D wireframe will possibly be hidden. Is always visible: 3D wireframe will be visible in all cases, independently of the projection angle.

Note that if you delete generated center lines, threads or axis lines, you will NOT be able to generate them again (by updating the drawing), even if you select the appropriate dress-up options in the Properties dialog box. It is impossible to restore generated center lines, threads or axis lines that have been deleted.

Generation Mode ●

●

Only generate parts larger than: specifies that you only want to generate parts which are larger than the size indicated (in millimeters) in the appropriate field. Enable occlusion culling: saves memory when generating exact views from an assembly (or a part or product) which is loaded in Visualization mode (i.e. when the Work with the cache system option is active). This will load only the parts which will be seen in the resulting view (instead of loading all of them, which is the case by default), which optimizes memory consumption and CPU usage.


Editing View Properties ●

View generation mode: lets you change how the view is generated. For more information on the various view generation modes, refer to View Generation Settings in the Customizing chapter. ❍ Exact view: turns the view into a exact view (the geometry becomes available). ❍

❍

❍

CGR: turns the view into a CGR view (only the external appearance of the component is used and displayed; the geometry is not available). Approximate: turns the view into an approximate view. Although approximate views are not as high in precision and quality as exact views, this generation mode dramatically reduces memory consumption. Performances may also be improved, depending on how you fine-tune precision. Therefore, the approximate mode is particularly well-adapted to sophisticated products or assemblies involving large amounts of data. Raster: turns the view into an image view. You can configure a number of options such as the level of detail or the type of image to generate (shading, shading with edges, etc.).

If you select a mix of exact, CGR, approximate and/or raster views, the options will be disabled. To activate these options, make sure you select views which are using the same generation mode.

Generative view style

●

●

The Generative view style area shows the generative view style which is applied to the view. If you have modified the values of the properties defined in the selected generative view style by editing some dress-up properties, for example, you can use the Reset to style values button to reset these values to the original style values. (To let you know when properties have been changed compared to the original generative style, an asterisk is displayed in front of them.)

The Generative view style properties are only available on generative views, when generative view style functionalities are activated (i.e. when the Prevent generative view style creation option is de-selected in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Administration tab).

[ Up ] [ Next ]


Editing 2D Geometry Feature Properties

Editing 2D Geometry Feature Properties This task shows you how to access and, if needed, edit information on 2D geometry features (name and stamp). Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. 1. Select a 2D element on the CATDrawing you opened. 2. Select the Edit->Properties command and click the Feature Properties tab. You can also right click the 2D element and then select the Properties command from the displayed contextual menu.

3. If needed, click the More switch. 4. Enter a new name for the element in the field. The information displayed concerns the creation of the elements. 5. Click the Graphic Tab, Lines and Curves option, Pickable option and Layers options are available. For settings, see Editing Element Graphic Properties.


Editing 2D Geometry Feature Properties

5. Click OK.



Editing 2D Element Graphic Properties

Editing 2D Element Graphic Properties This task explains how to access and, if needed, edit graphic properties. Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. 1. Select a 2D element on the CATDrawing you opened. 2. Select the Edit-> Properties command and click the Graphic tab. You can also right click the current element and then select the Properties command from the displayed contextual menu. 3. If needed, click the More switch. 4. If needed, modify the available options:

●

●

Fill: ❍ you can color the selected element and set the filling transparency. Edges: ❍ it allows you to define edges colors, thickness and the type of line (dotted,



dashed, etc.), see Graphic Properties Toolbar. ●

●

Lines and Curves: ❍ it allows you to define lines and curves colors, thickness and the type of line (dotted, dashed, etc.), see Graphic Properties Toolbar. Show, Pick and Layers: ❍ you can choose if the element will be shown or not (check/uncheck Shown option) ❍

❍

you can activate or deactivate Pickable mode, if you uncheck it geometry will not be selectable anymore, see Pick/No Pick mode. you can choose a layer for the selected geometry.

5. Click OK. For more information on graphic properties, please refer to Infrastructure User's guide.

Pick/No Pick mode When you create elements using the No Pick mode (Pickable option unchecked), ● If you want to make one or several elements pickable back again, perform as follows: 1. Select Edit -> Search from the menu bar and select the element(s) to be modified from the Search dialog box. 2. Select Edit -> Properties option from the menu bar and check the Pickable option from the Properties dialog box. ●

If you want to make all the elements on a sheet or in a view pickable back again, perform as follows: 1. Click the sheet or the view(s) to be applied the Pick mode from the specification tree. 2. Select the Force Pick Mode option from the contextual menu.



Graphic Properties Toolbar You can also modify the graphic properties using the Graphic Properties toolbar.

The Graphic Properties toolbar allows modifying the following graphical options: ● the line color ●

the line type

●

the line weight

●

copying objects (Copy Object Format icon

●

)

the pattern (Pattern Chooser option ) This option displays the Pattern dialog box:



Care when you assign graphical attributes to a line (for example, make it thick and red). When you turn this red thick line into a construction line (from the contextual menu: Object.Line -> Definition..., Construction line option in the Line Definition dialog box), the line will become a dotted gray line. Even though you then decide to make it a standard line back again (by un-checking the Construction line option), the line will have lost its "red" and "thickness" attributes and will be assigned its original attributes.



Editing Pattern Properties

Editing Pattern Properties This task explains how to access and, if needed, edit pattern properties. Patterns are used for area fills or, in a Generative Drafting context, when cutting through material in section views/cuts or breakout views, for example.

Open the GenDrafting_Edit_Pattern_Properties.CATDrawing document.

1. Select the pattern be modified. For the purpose of our scenario, select the hatching pattern in the Section view.

2. Select Edit-> Properties. You can also right-click the pattern and then select Properties from the displayed contextual menu. 3. In the Properties dialog box that appears, click the Pattern tab.



4. If you want to define your own pattern, choose a pattern type from the Type dropdown list. The types available depend on the standard used by the drawing. Or if you want to choose from the various patterns available, click the [...] button. This will display the pattern chooser, from which you can make your selection. 5. Select your options as required.



The options available depend on the type of pattern you selected, as well as on the standard used by the drawing. Hatching ● Number of hatchings: Defines the number of different hatchings to use in this pattern. A tab will be created for each hatching, to let you define each one individually. This option is unavailable with the current drawing standard. ●

Angle: For each hatching this pattern, specifies the angle value in degrees.

●

Pitch: For each hatching in this pattern, specifies the pitch in millimeters.

●

Offset: For each hatching in this pattern, specifies the offset in millimeters.

●

●

●

●

Color: For each hatching in this pattern, specifies the color. This option is unavailable with the current drawing standard. Linetype: For each hatching in this pattern, specifies the linetype. This option is unavailable with the current drawing standard. Thickness: For each hatching in this pattern, specifies the linetype thickness. This option is unavailable with the current drawing standard. Preview: Lets you preview the resulting hatching pattern.

Dotting ● Pitch: Specifies the dotting pitch in millimeters. ●

Color: Specifies the dotting color.

●

Zigzag: Specifies whether dotting should zigzag.

●

Preview: Lets you preview the resulting dotting pattern.

Coloring ● Color: Specifies the color. ●

Preview: Lets you preview the resulting coloring pattern.

Image ● Browse button: Lets you select the image to use for this pattern. This option is unavailable with the current drawing standard. You can only use the images defined by the administrator. These images are available from the pattern chooser (click the [...] button). ●

Angle: Specifies the angle value in degrees.

●

Scale: Specifies the scale.

●

Preview: Lets you preview the original image (not the result after modifying the angle and scale).



When editing the properties of a pattern associated with a part material, the software offers its own selection of patterns, and not the patterns defined in the standard.

6. Click OK.

Graphic Properties Toolbar You can also modify pattern properties using the Pattern icon Properties toolbar.

This option displays the Pattern dialog box:


on the Graphic




Editing Annotation Font Properties

Editing Annotation Font Properties This task explains how to access and, if needed, edit annotation font properties. Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. Create a free text, for example. 1. Double-click the text to switch it to edit mode. 2. Select the whole text (you can also select only part of the text) and then select the Edit-> Properties command. You can also right-click on the selected text and then choose Properties from the contextual menu. 3. In the Properties dialog box that appears, click the Font tab. The associated panel is displayed.

●

●

Font, Style, Size, Underline and Color: choose the font, size, style and color of the text, and underline it. Attributes: draw a line through (Strikethrough) or above (Overline) the selected text, and make it superscript or subscript.



You can either underline or overline a text, but you cannot do both.

●

Character: ❍ Ratio: modify character size. ❍

Slant: modify character slant (for italic text, slant=15 deg).

❍

Spacing: change the spacing between characters.

❍

Pitch: set a fixed or a variable pitch. As an example, create the free text "Tools" and apply the font ROM1.

Fixed Pitch

Variable Pitch

The Slant and Pitch options are available only for stroke fonts. Clicking the More button will display extra options, if any are available. 4. Modify the available options as required. 5. Click OK. For more information on font properties, please refer to the Infrastructure User's guide.

Changing Character Ratio and Spacing In this task, you will learn how to change the character ratio and spacing of a portion of text, but it is also possible to change these for a whole text. Create a free text. 1. Double-click the text to switch it to edit mode.



2. Select a portion of text and right-click it.

3. Click Properties in the menu that appears. The Properties dialog box appears. 4. Click the Font tab. 5. In the Character area, increase or decrease the value in the Ratio field to change the character ratio.

5. Modify the value in the Spacing field to change the character spacing.

6. Click OK to validate your changes. The text is updated.

Making Text Superscript or Subscript In this task, you will learn how to make a text superscript, how to make a text subscript, and how to specify their position. Create a free text.



1. Double-click the text to switch it to edit mode. 2. Type a text, "subscript" for example, after the text you created previously.

3. Select the piece of text you just typed and right-click it.

4. Click Properties in the menu that appears. The Properties dialog box appears. 5. Click the Font tab. 6. In the Attributes area, select the Subscript check box.

7. Click OK to validate your changes. The selected text is made subscript. 8. Now type another text, "superscript" for example, after the existing text. For the moment, the new text takes on the properties of the subscript text in front of it.



9. Select the piece of text you just typed and right-click it.

10. Repeat steps 4 and 5. 11. In the Attributes area, select the Superscript check box (instead of Subscript) and click OK. The selected text is made superscript. 12. For the purpose of this exercise, you will now align the subscript and superscript texts and set their offset and size. To do this, select the whole text and right-click it.

The offset defines the vertical position of the superscript or subscript text from the baseline of the text. The size defines the height of the superscript or subscript text. Both values are expressed as a percentage of the font size.

13. Click Properties in the menu that appears. 14. In the Properties dialog box, click the Text tab. 15. In the Options area, select the Back Field check box to align the texts.

16. Increase or decrease the values for the superscript and subscript texts in the Offset and Size fields to set the offset and size. 17. Click OK to validate. The subscript and superscript texts are now aligned and set as defined.



This functionality does not always work when the text is wrapped.



Editing Text Properties

Editing Text Properties This task explains how to access and, if needed, modify text color, position and/or orientation. You will also learn how to specify the text display mode. Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. Create an annotation such as a free text, for example.

1. Select the annotation you just created. (For the purpose of this exercise, you select a free text, but you could also select any other type of annotation.) 2. Select the Edit-> Properties command. You can also right-click on this dimension and then choose Properties from the contextual menu. 3. Click the Text tab. The associated panel is displayed.



●

●

Frame: you can choose a frame type for the selected text that is to say rectangle, triangle, circle, etc. You can specify the color, line thickness and line type for the frame in the associated fields. Position: ❍ Anchor Point: you can change the text position in relation to the anchor point. ❍

Justification: you can specify a justification for the text: left, center or right.

❍

X, Y: you can modify anchor point coordinates.

❍

●

Anchor Mode: it allows you to position the anchor line to the character Top and Bottom or to the character Cap or Base.

Line Spacing Mode: you can choose the spacing mode between to line of characters. As an example, create the following free text:

Now, select base to cap option in the combo box. The spacing between the two lines will be between the base of first line characters and cap of second line characters:



●

●

Line spacing: you can increase or decrease the spacing between two lines of characters. Word wrap: allows you to wrap the text in a width you specify.

When you create a free text, the anchor point is the point you click in free space to define a location for the free text. ●

Orientation: specify a text orientation. ❍ Reference: choose Sheet to use the sheet as the reference for the text orientation, or View / 2D Component to use the view or 2D component as the reference for the text orientation. ❍

❍

❍

●

Orientation: the text is oriented according to the chosen reference; choose Horizontal to position it horizontally, Vertical to position it vertically or Fixed Angle to position it using a fixed angle. Angle: if you choose Fixed Angle for Orientation, you can define the orientation angle according to the chosen reference. Mirroring: specify whether you want to apply a mirroring to the selected text, and what kind of mirroring, or if the text should flip automatically in such a way that it will always be in a readable position.

Options: ❍ Display Units: in a text containing parameters with units, displays these units. ❍

Apply scale: applies the scale of the view or of the 2D reference component to the display of the text.

If you want to use as symbols 2D components with text, activate both the Apply Scale property and the Create with a constant size setting (in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Annotation and Dress-up tab): the size of both the 2D component and its text will then be independent from the view scale. ❍ ❍

❍

❍

❍

Back Field: aligns superscript and subscript texts above one another. Blank Background: specifies that the text background should be blanked when the text is displayed over a pattern or over a picture. Superscript: increase or decrease the values for the superscript texts in the Offset and Size fields to set the offset and size. Subscript: increase or decrease the values for the subscript texts in the Offset and Size fields to set the offset and size. Display: specifies a display mode for the text.



4. Click the More switch button to check if extra options are available. 5. Modify the available options as required. 6. Click OK.

Specifying the Text Display Mode In this task, you will learn how to specify the display mode for the text. For the purpose of this exercise, you will use a text with a leader and a frame, but this feature is also available with text only, as well as with dimension texts. Create a text with a leader and a frame.

1. Select the text and right-click it. 2. Click Properties in the menu that appears. The Properties dialog box appears. 3. Click the Text tab. 4. In the Options area, choose the display mode you want for your text from the Display list. You have the following options:



●

●

●

Show Value: displays the text, and (when applicable) its leader and its frame. This option is selected by default.

Show Box: replaces the text and (when applicable) its frame by a rectangular box and displays its leader.

Hide Value: hides the text and (when applicable) its frame but (when applicable) displays its leader.

5. Click OK to validate. The text is now displayed using the mode you set.

If you select Hide Value as the display mode for a text with no leader, the text will not be visible at all on your drawing. You can find all hidden texts in a drawing using advanced Search options. To do this, choose Edit -> Search, click the Advanced tab. Select Drafting from the Workbench list, Text from the Type list, Display from the Attributes list. In the dialog box that appears, select = and Hide Value and then click OK. Click the Search button. All hidden texts are listed.

In the case of dimensions, the display modes are as shown below: ● Show Value: displays the dimension and its leader. This option is selected by default.

●

Show Box: replaces the dimension by a rectangular box and displays its leader.



●

Hide Value: hides the dimension but displays its leader.



Editing Dimension Text Properties

Editing Dimension Text Properties This task explains how to access and, if needed, edit dimension text properties. Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. Create a diameter dimension, for example. 1. Select a dimension (whatever the type) on the CATDrawing you opened. 2. Select the Edit-> Properties command and click the Dimension Texts tab. You can also right click the current element and then select the Properties command from the displayed contextual menu. 3. If needed, click the More switch. 4. If needed, modify the available options.

●

Prefix - Suffix: you can insert either a symbol or a text before the dimension text or a text after the dimension text.


Editing Dimension Text Properties

You can not insert a prefix and a suffix. If you want to remove the symbol before the dimension text, select this symbol: ●

Associated Texts: you can insert texts before, after, below and above the main and the dual value.

Dimension texts positioning:

●

●

Dimension score options: you can choose to score only the value, all dimension texts or not to score (for Main Value and/or Dual Value). Dimension frame options: you can choose to include in the frame Value+tolerance +texts or Value+tolerance or Value for Main Value, Dual Value or both.

5. Click OK.



Editing Dimension Value Properties

Editing Dimension Value Properties This task explains how to access and, if needed, edit dimension value properties. Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. Create a diameter dimension, for example. 1. Select a dimension (whatever the type) on the CATDrawing you opened. 2. Select the Edit-> Properties command and click the Value tab. You can also right click the current element and then select the Properties command from the displayed contextual menu. 3. If needed, click the More switch. 4. If needed, modify the available options.



Dimension Type: check Driving if you want projected dimensions to drive geometry. If you want to key in a value for the driving dimension, you must close Properties dialog box, double-click the dimension in the drawing, check Drive geometry and key in a value. Value Orientation: you can choose ● the value orientation reference (Screen, View or Dimension Line), ●

the value orientation (Parallel, Perpendicular or Fixed Angle),

●

the orientation angle if Fixed Angle is selected in orientation,

●

the value position (Auto, Inside or Outside),

●

the value offset in relation to the dimension line.



Dual Value: you can show dual value checking Show dual value option and choose its location. Format: you can set Main value and Dual value format. ● Description: select a type of format. ●

Display: choose to display one, two or three factors.

●

Format: choose fractional or decimal format.

●

Precision: select the value precision.

For chamfer, you can set Description, Display and Format in chamfer tab. Fake Dimension: check this option to display fake dimensions, you can choose to display numerical or alphanumerical fake dimensions. Text limitation: eight characters. If you need to insert a text containing more than eight characters: ● leave the dimension text blank (for this, you can create a blank fake dimension), ●

create an associated text.

5. Click OK.



Editing Dimension Tolerance Properties

Editing Dimension Tolerance Properties This task explains how to access and, if needed, edit dimension tolerance properties. There are different types of tolerances: ●

Numerical tolerances

●

Alphanumerical tolerances

●

Combined tolerances (an alphanumerical value and two numerical values): ISOCOMB tolerance.

Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. Create a diameter dimension, for example. 1. Select the diameter dimension. 2. Select the Edit-> Properties command and click the Tolerance tab. You can also right-click the dimension and then select the Properties command from the displayed contextual menu. 3. You can associate a tolerance to the selected dimension. In this example, choose ISOALPH1 in the Main Value field. The First value field is enabled and displays an alphanumerical value. The corresponding numerical equivalents are displayed in the Upper value and Lower value fields. (These equivalents are defined by standards.)



4. Assign the desired tolerance to this dimension by selecting another alphanumerical value. In this example, select H9 in the First value field. The corresponding numerical numerical equivalents are automatically displayed.

5. In some cases, you may wish to display another tolerance. In this case, select a tolerance type in the Dual Value field. If you choose the same tolerance type for main and for dual value, then the values for this tolerance will also be the same.

6. Click OK. For dimensions with alphanumerical tolerances, you can display the corresponding numerical equivalents in the drawing, simply by placing the cursor over the dimension value in the drawing. The numerical equivalents are displayed in a tooltip.





Editing Dimension Extension Line Properties

Editing Dimension Extension Line Properties This task explains how to access and, if needed, edit dimension extension line properties. Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. Create a diameter dimension, for example. 1. Select the dimension you created (whatever the type). 2. Select the Edit-> Properties command. You can also right-click on this dimension and then choose Properties from the contextual menu. 3. In the Properties dialog box that appears, click the Extension Line tab. The associated panel is displayed.



●

Color: choose a color for the extension line.

●

Thickness: specify the thickness of the extension line.

●

●

●

Display first extension line: check to display or uncheck to hide the first extension line, when applicable. Display second extension line: check to display or uncheck to hide the second extension line, when applicable. Slant: set the slant angle for the extension line. This angle is contained between 90 degrees and -90 degrees excluded, the default angle being 0 degree.

This functionality works only on linear dimension line and the line linking extension line anchor points (blanking excluded) has to be parallel to the dimension line, as shown below.

●

Extremities: it allows you to increase or decrease extension line Overrun and Blanking.

Overrun is the overrun minimum value. As an example, for a cumulated dimension (for ISO Standard):

You can increase the overrun size

You cannot decrease it below the minimum value

To set extension line length and text position for cumulated dimensions, use the CUMLExtMode dimension parameter in the standards.



●

Funnel: to insert a funnel, you must check this option. You can configure the funnel: ❍ the Height, ❍

the Angle,

❍

the Width,

❍

the funnel mode: external or internal

External Funnel Mode ●

Internal Funnel Mode

the Funnel side allows you to apply funnel only on one extension line or both of them.

You cannot create interruptions on funneled dimension lines. 4. Modify the available options as required. 5. Click OK.



Editing Dimension Line Properties

Editing Dimension Line Properties This task explains how to access and, if needed, edit dimension line properties. Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. Create a diameter dimension, for example. 1. Select the dimension you just created (whatever the type). 2. Select the Edit-> Properties command. You can also right-click on this dimension and then choose Properties from the contextual menu. 3. In the Properties dialog box that appears, click the Dimension Line tab. The associated panel is displayed. Not all fields are active: their activation depends on your choice of options.



Representation Specify how you want the dimension line represented: Regular, Two Parts, Leader one Part, Leader two Parts. Color Choose a color for the dimension line. Thickness Specify the thickness of the dimension line. Second part If you chose Two parts or Leader two Parts for the representation, you need to provide information about the second leader part: ● the Reference for positioning the second part of the dimension line, ●

●

the Orientation for the secondary part of the dimension line in relation to its reference, the Angle for the secondary part of the dimension line in relation to its reference (if you selected Dimension Line in the Orientation field and Fixed Angle in the Reference field).

Extension Choose an extension type for your dimension line. Leader Angle Specify the angle you want for the extension line. Symbols Choose the properties you want to apply to Symbol 1, Symbol 2 (you may need to check this box to specify you want to the dimension to display two symbols), and Leader Symbol (if you chose to represent the dimension line with a leader). ● Shape: you can choose the dimension line shape (arrow, circle, plus, etc.). ●

Color: you can choose the symbols color.

●

Thickness: you can define the symbol thickness.

●

Reversal: set the position of the symbols (inside or outside) in relation to the extension line.



In the case of two-symbols dimensions, you can specify a different position for each symbol (i.e. symbol 1 inside and symbol 2 outside, or vice-versa). You can also this interactively using the Ctrl key. You can apply different kinds of modifications between arrow symbol 1 and symbol 2 on the condition the drawing was created from version 5 release 5 on. Foreshortened For radius dimensions, you can activate the Foreshortened option.

It allows you to transform a radius dimension line into a foreshortened radius dimension line. You can then choose from the following options: ● Text position: specify whether the text should be positioned on the long segment or on the short segment of the dimension. ●

● ●

●

●

Orientation: define the orientation of the text associated to the dimension line (parallel or convergent). Angle: specify the angle value. Ratio: specify the ratio for the short segment and the long segment of the foreshortened dimension. Point scale: specify the point scale value. Unfix extremity position: check this box to unfix the extremity point of the foreshortened dimension line. You will then be able to move the extremity point using a yellow manipulator.

For foreshortened radius dimensions, you can define the appearance of the extremity point by making sure the Symbol 2 box in the Symbols area is checked, and then choosing the appropriate options.

Clicking the More button will display extra options, if any are available.



4. Modify the available options as required. For example, from the Representation drop-down list, choose Leader two Parts.

5. In the Leader Angle field, specify the angle you want between the two parts of the leader.

This angle is applied to the first segment:

You can also drive the second segment from the options in the Second Part area: it can be horizontal, vertical, parallel, perpendicular, fixed angle with screen, view, or dimension horizontal and vertical. 6. Change the Leader symbol in Symbols-> Shape. Choose Double Filled Arrow, for example.



7. Transform this two parts leader into a one part leader: from the Representation drop-down list, choose Leader one Part.

8. Click OK.



Editing 2D Component Instance Properties

Editing 2D Component Instance Properties This task explains how to access and, if needed, edit information on instantiated 2D component properties. Open the Position_Component03.CATDrawing document. 1. Right-click on the Instance to access the contextual menu. 2. Select Properties command and click the 2D Component tab. You can modify the 2D component instance position and orientation:


Editing 2D Component Instance Properties

You can also select the instance and go to Edit -> Properties command and click the 2D Component tab. ● Location: It allows you to access to the instance location and the origin of the 2D component it was instantiated from. ●

Position and orientation: you can modify detail instantiated 2D component coordinates, angle with horizontal reference axis and scale.

3. Click OK.

[ Back ] [ Up ]


Images

Images The Generative Drafting workbench lets you add images to Drafting sheets as well as edit them.

Insert images Insert raster or vector images in a drawing. Edit images Edit raster images using the raster editor, or view information about vector images.



Inserting Images (Raster or Vector)

Inserting Images (Raster or Vector) This functionality allows you to insert images on every operating system. It is useful for V4 Drawings translation. In this task, we will see how to insert raster (*.bmp, *.jpg, *.tif, etc.) or vector images (*.cgm. *.gl, *.gl2) as native V5 Drafting elements. The scenario below provides an example using a raster image, but the procedure is the same for vector images.

●

Define a new sheet and a view.

●

Insert a frame title block, choose the Drawing_Titleblock_Samples1.

●

Save the logo.tif document on your computer (to do this, right-click on "logo.tif" and choose Save Target As in the contextual menu).

1. Select the Insert -> Picture command.

A dialog box appears, allowing you to browse your disk. 2. Select the file "logo.gif" you have previously imported. The image is imported in your drawing. 3. Click on the image to select it. Scaling manipulators appear. Drag one of the http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driugbt1401.htm (1 of 3)10/20/2004 5:40:21 PM


manipulators to decrease the picture size.

You get this:

The image is a native V5 Drafting element, it is positioned by default at the origin of the view. The anchor point of the picture corresponds to its lower left-hand corner. ●

In the Properties dialog box available from the image's contextual menu, on the Picture tab, check the Lock aspect ratio option to make sure images will keep their ratio aspect.

●

If the previous option is unchecked, use the Ctrl key to keep the picture ratio aspect.

●

Use the Shift key to snap to the grid.

4. Drag the image to the required position.



[ Up ] [ Next ]


Editing Raster Images

Editing Raster Images In this task, you will learn how to edit raster images (*.bmp, *.jpg, *.tif, etc.) inserted in a drawing. Save the logo.tif document on your computer (to do this, right-click on "logo.tif" and choose Save Target As in the contextual menu) and insert it in your drawing. 1. Double-click on the raster image. The Image Editor dialog box is displayed.


Editing Raster Images

2. Edit the image as wanted. For more information on how to edit images, refer to Editing Images in the Album in the Infrastructure User's Guide. 3. When you are done, click OK. The image is updated in the drawing.

Viewing information about vector images You cannot edit vector images (*.cgm. *.gl, *.gl2) inserted in a drawing, but you can, however, view information about them. To do this, simply double-click on a vector image in a drawing. This will display the Image information dialog box. To exit the dialog box when you are done reviewing the image-related information, click OK.

[ Back ] [ Up ]


Interoperability

Interoperability The Generative Drafting workbench provides a simple method to create and modify views from a .model.

Create and modify views from a .model Use a master model exact solid to create and modify views from a .model.



Creating and Modifying Views from a .Model

Creating and Modifying Views from a .Model This task will show you how to create and modify views from a .model on the condition this .model is a master model Exact Solid.

Open pm6-7b-1e_gun_body_draw.model. Tile the windows horizontally to see your drawing sheet and your Sheet Metal part at the same time.

1. Create projection views from this .model. The views are generated.

●

●

The only modifications you can perform on views generated from .model documents are dress-up modifications. Dress-up modifications applied to any .model are not associative.


Creating and Modifying Views from a .Model

Elements from .model documents are handled differently depending on their type and on the type of view you are generating: ● In section cuts, section views, and breakout views: Exact Solid and Skin elements from .model documents are supported in exact mode. ●

In projection views, quick detail views, clipping views and broken views: Exact Solid and Skin elements from .model documents are supported in exact mode. All elements from .model documents are supported in CGR and raster mode.

[ Up ]


Printing a Document

Printing a Document The Generative Drafting workbench provides a simple method for print one or more sheets inserted in your document.

Print a document quickly Quickly print a given sheet. Print a document after modifying current display settings Modify the settings of a document you will then print.

[ Back ] [ Up ]


Printing a Document Quickly

Printing a Document Quickly This task will show you how to quickly print a given sheet. When printing a sheet, the current filter and layers (those used for screen display) are taken into account. For more details on layers and filters, see Infrastructure User's Guide. Open a CATDrawing document. Create a circle, a line and a profile on this document.

1. Select File -> Print Preview from the menu bar. The Print Preview dialog box is displayed. 2. Press OK.



3. Select File -> Print from the menu bar. The Print dialog box displays. 4. Click the required options from the box. 5. Press OK. You may print either all or given sheets (the sheet selected or a given number of existing



sheets). You may also print the views currently displayed on your screen (Current display option).

You may also choose the number of copies you need to print. Fitting choice provides the following options: ●

●

●

: Assigns the best orientation to the views to be printed. : Prints keeping the printer options. : Clips the drawing representation to the sheet format.

For details on Options, see Infrastructure User's guide Version 5. By default the sheet to be printed will Fit to Printer Format. The printer default format will be used whatever the sheet format. Let's say the printer format is Portrait. If you check the options as described below, the sheet will be previewed and printed as follows.

Best Orientation/Fit to printer format/Clip to the sheet format



Fit to printer format/Clip to the sheet format

Clip to the sheet format



Best orientation/Clip to the sheet format



Let's start from a new drawing:

Best Orientation/Fit to printer format/Clip to the sheet format



Best Orientation/Fit to printer format



[ Up ] [ Next ]


Printing a Document After Modifying Current Display Settings

Printing a Document After Modifying Current Display Settings This task shows how to modify the settings of a document you will then print. Create views on different sheets with the Landscape orientation. 1. Select File -> Print from the menu bar. The Print dialog box is displayed. 2. Click the required Printer options from the dialog box. 3. Activate the Current display option. 4. Click the Options option from the box.



5. If needed, select the Color tab.

6. If needed, select the Banner tab.

7. If needed, select the Various tab. 8. Click OK.



9. Click the Settings option from the Print dialog box. The Layout dialog box is displayed. 10. De-activate the Fit in Page option. 11. For example, click the center switch for positioning the sheet at the center of the previewed layout. 12. Press OK.

13. Select the Print Preview option from the Print dialog box. The Print Preview dialog box is displayed. 14. Press OK. The Print dialog box is displayed. 15. Press OK to launch the printing operation.



[ Back ] [ Up ]


Administration Tasks

Administration Tasks In the Generative Drafting workbench, administration tasks deals with the administration of generative view styles. You can manage and customize the styles that will be used to generate views using the Standards Editor. Before you begin Administering Generative View Styles and Standards Setting Generative View Style Parameters

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/draug_C2/draugsa0000.htm10/20/2004 5:42:25 PM

Before you begin

Before you begin About Generative View Styles Generative view styles let you customize the appearance and behavior of a generated view via a set of pre-defined parameters and options. Administrators can create one or several generative view styles from which users can choose when creating a generative view. Generative view styles are defined in an XML file.

Some workbenches (such as the Structure Functional Design workbench, for example) also offer the possibility of configuring generative view styles. These styles will be specific to views generated from this workbench, and will specify the appearance of the geometry to be generated. To know if a given workbench supports generative view styles, refer to its documentation.

Management of Generative View Styles One generative view style per view When you create a view using a generative view style, you specify the XML file that will be associated with this view. Within a drawing, you can only associate one generative view style to a given view, but you can use several generative view style files by associating different files to different views.

Standalone drawings The values of the parameters in the specified XML file are then copied into the CATDrawing document. Each drawing contains an embedded copy of the generative view style(s) it uses. The drawing is therefore standalone. This makes it possible for users, projects, or companies to exchange CATDrawing documents without needing to send the generative view style file along.

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/draug_C2/draugsa0100.htm (1 of 4)10/20/2004 5:42:34 PM

Before you begin

Administrator-controlled access and modification The administrator defines and controls the location of the generative view style files as well as the ability to modify existing ones. For example, the administrator can define a single generative view style, and prevent users from modifying it.

Administrator-controlled authorized styles The administrator defines the list of authorized generative view styles, in the Drafting standards XML file.

A generative view style file available by default By default, a pre-defined generative view style file is delivered. This file is located in install_root/resources/standard/generativeparameters/ DefaultGenerativeStyle.xml. Administrators can customize this file to define their default generative view styles. They can also use this file as a template for creating new generative view styles. They can add as many generative view style files as needed. Refer to Administering Generative View Styles for more information.

Do not delete the DefaultGenerativeStyle.xml file: it contains all generative view style parameters. Furthermore, it is used as a default if a parameter happens to be missing from a custom view style file (in this case, the corresponding parameter defined in DefaultGenerativeStyle.xml will be used instead). In case the DefaultGenerativeStyle.xml file cannot be found, then the application will use its own default parameter instead.

Editing the generative view style file The generative view style files can be edited using an interactive editor. This editor provides an easy-to-use graphic interface to let you customize the parameters included in the generative view style file. For information on how to customize the parameters included in the generative view style file, refer to Setting Generative View Style Parameters. The interactive editor is available in Tools -> Standards. (It is the same editor with which you can customize the Drafting standards). For more information on how to use this editor, refer to the Customizing Standards chapter in the Infrastructure User's Guide.


Before you begin

Make sure you use the Standards editor available in Tools -> Standards when modifying and customizing the XML generative view style files. Using other editors (such as text editors) may alter the consistency of the generative view style XML files, and may make them unusable.

Import of a newer version of a generative view style file Once a generative view style has been assigned to a view, it is embedded into the drawing. This means that if you update the generative view style file that was used to create the view, the style of the view itself will not be modified and will remain as it was when the view was created. To modify the style used by the view, you need to import the newer version of the generative view style XML file into the drawing. To do so, select Tools -> Import a generative view style. In the dialog box which is displayed, select the generative view style to import and click OK. Note the following points: ● The newer, imported generative view style will completely override the older version of the generative view style in all views which use this generative view style. ●

If the drawing contains views which use other generative view styles, these views will not be affected by the import.

Importing a newer version of a given generative view style file will be useful to ensure that views created on a previous release using the generative view styles provided by default with the application benefit from the new styles parameters that were added in the latest release.

Using Generative View Styles Creating views using generative view styles When generating a view from the 3D, users can choose to use one of the styles defined by the administrator. Refer to Creating Views Using Generative View Styles.

Switching a view to another generative view style Once a view has been created using a specific generative view style, it is possible to switch this view to another view style. Refer to Switching a View to Another http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/draug_C2/draugsa0100.htm (3 of 4)10/20/2004 5:42:34 PM

Before you begin

Generative View Style.

Applying the generative style of a view to another view You can apply the generative view style used to create a given view to another view. Refer to Applying the Generative Style of a View to Another View.

Applying a generative view style to a view You can apply a generative view style to a view which was created without one. Refer to Applying a Generative View Style to a View After its Creation.

[ Up ] [ Next ]


Administering Generative View Styles and Standards

Administering Generative View Styles and Standards This task documents the administration of both generative view styles (Generative Drafting workbench) and standards (Interactive Drafting workbench), as the procedure is basically the same whether you are administering generative view styles or standards. The examples provided in this task specifically deal with the administration of generative view styles. For more information on customizing and administering standards, refer to the Administration Tasks chapter in the Interactive Drafting User's Guide.

Location of generative view style files or standard files The location of generative view style files or standard files is defined by two environment variables which can be set during installation or modified afterwards: Variable name CATCollectionStandard

Description Path and name of the directory (or directories) which contains: ● the generativeparameters sub-directories (which themselves contain the customized generative view styles). It is in these generativeparameters sub-directories that you should add the generative view styles customized for a company, project or user. ●

the drafting sub-directories (which themselves contain the customized drafting standards). It is in these drafting subdirectories that you should add the drafting standards customized for a company, project or user.


Administering Generative View Styles and Standards

CATDefaultCollectionStandard Path and name of the directory (or directories) which contains: ● the generativeparameters sub-directories (which themselves contain the predefined generative view styles delivered by Dassault Systemes). ●

the drafting sub-directories (which themselves contain the predefined drafting standards delivered by Dassault Systemes).

The default location for this directory (set during the installation process) is the installation directory install_root\resources\standard.

Setting the location of generative view style files Refer to the Administration Tasks chapter in the Interactive Drafting User's Guide for specific information on how to set the location of generative view style files. There are two possibilities: ●

If you want to place all customized generative view styles in a custom directory, named mydirectory for example, you need to proceed as follows: 1. Create a directory named as you like (mydirectory, for example). 2. Create a sub-directory under this directory, which needs to be named generativeparameters. 3. Place the XML files containing your customized generative view styles in mydirectory\generativeparameters.

●

If you have not yet customized your XML generative view style files, then proceed as follows: 1. Create a directory named as you like (mydirectory, for example). 2. Create a sub-directory under this directory, which needs to be named generativeparameters. 3. Set the CATCollectionStandard variable to mydirectory. After you have customized the XML generative view style files, the standard editor will then save them in mydirectory \generativeparameters.


Administering Generative View Styles and Standards ●

●

If the CATDefaultCollectionStandard and the CATCollectionStandard variables both contain an identically-named generative view styles, it is always the style found in CATCollectionStandard which will be used. If two directories referenced by the CATCollectionStandard and/or CATDefaultCollectionStandard variables contain identically-named generative view style files, it is always the style in the directory listed first which will be used.

Customizing and defining generative view styles or standards To edit and save generative view style files or standard files in Tools -> Standards, you must be running the V5 session in administrator mode (-admin). The recommended method for customizing generative view style files or standard files is the following: 1. You need to work in administrator mode. To do this, proceed as follows: a. Set up the CATReferenceSettingPath variable. b. Start a V5 session using the -admin option. For more information, refer to the Managing Environments chapter in the Infrastructure Installation Guide. 2. Set up the CATCollectionStandard environment variable as explained above. If none of the conditions are respected, a warning message will appear to let you know that you will neither be able to modify nor save the XML files. 3. Modify the generative view styles or the Drafting standards as appropriate. 4. Use the Save As or the OK button to store your modifications. 5. To exit, use the Cancel button. Once the generative view style files or the standard files have been customized and saved, they can be used in a V5 session in normal mode.



Setting Generative View Style Parameters

Setting Generative View Style Parameters The Generative Drafting workbench lets you set generative view style parameters. Before you begin You should be familiar with important concepts such as the structure of generative view styles and how to customize generative view style parameters. Generate parameters Specifies whether the elements will be projected in the view or not. View dress-up parameters Defines the style of the various parameters which deal with the dress-up of the view. [ Back ] [ Up ]


Before you begin

Before you begin Structure of the Generative View Styles A generative view style file is structured as a tree, as it appears in the Standards Editor (available via Tools -> Standards). It contains several main sections, one of which is specifically devoted to customizing generative view styles for drafting. This section contains sub-sections, each dealing with a specific aspect of drafting customization: ● Generate parameters: specifies whether the elements will be projected in the view or not. ●

View dress-up parameters: defines the style of the various parameters which deal with the dress-up of the view.


Before you begin

Customizing Generative View Style Parameters In this scenario, you will learn how to customize generative view style parameters using a specific example. The pre-defined DefaultGenerativeStyle.xml file specifies that hidden edges should be displayed in black, using a specific linetype and thickness. You will modify these parameters so that hidden edges are displayed in orange, for example, and using a different linetype and thickness.

Open the GenDrafting_part.CATPart document. Select Tools -> Standards to launch the standards editor. Choose the generativeparameters category, and then open the DefaultGenerativeStyle.xml file from the drop-down list.

1. In the editor, expand the following nodes successively: DefaultGenerativeStyle -> Drafting -> ViewDressup -> GeneratedGeometry -> HiddenEdges. 2. Select the Color parameter. 3. Set the color to orange, for example by choosing another color from the dropdown list in the right-hand pane. 4. Select the Linetype parameter. 5. Set the linetype to 4, for example by choosing another linetype number from the drop-down list in the right-hand pane. Note: Linetypes are defined in Tools -> Options -> General -> Display -> Linetype tab. 6. Select the Thickness parameter. 7. Set the thickness to 2, for example by choosing another thickness number from the drop-down list in the right-hand pane. Note: Thicknesses are defined in Tools -> Standards -> Drafting category -> [StandardFile] -> Linethickness node. 8. Click OK to save your modifications and exit the standards editor. 9. Define a new drawing sheet. 10. Create a front view. The view is generated, taking into account the parameters you defined.


Before you begin

[ Up ] [ Next ]


Generate Parameters

Generate Parameters Generate parameters are located in the Drafting -> Generate nodes of the generative view style XML file. They specify whether the elements should be projected in the view. Parameter

Value

AxisLines

Yes/No

CenterLines

Yes/No

Fillets

None / Boundaries / OriginalEdges / ProjectedOriginalEdges

HiddenLines

Yes/No

Threads

Yes/No

3DPoints

Yes/No

Wireframe

Yes/No

Using3DColors

Yes/No

Using3DSpec

Yes/No



Description Specifies whether axis lines should be projected. Specifies whether center lines should be projected. Defines the fillet representation mode. Specifies whether hidden lines should be projected. Specifies whether threads should be projected. Specifies whether 3D points should be projected. Specifies whether wireframe should be projected. Specifies whether colors defined in 3D should be kept. Specifies whether 3D specifications (cut, use, hidden lines) should be used.

View Dress-Up parameters

View Dress-Up parameters View dress-up parameters are located in the Drafting -> ViewDressup nodes of the generative view style XML file (available in Tools -> Standard -> generativeparameters category -> *.XML file). They define the style of the various parameters which deal with the dress-up of the view. There are various kinds of dress-up parameters: ● Operators ●

3D Inheritance

●

GeneratedGeometry

Operators Parameter

Parameter Name Value Color

Section

Linetype Thickness Color

Section -> SkinSection Linetype Thickness Color Section -> SolidSection Linetype Thickness Color Detail

Linetype Thickness

Description

Determines the color of the section profile. Determines the linetype used for integer the section profile. Determines the line thickness integer used for the section profile. Determines the color of the skin color section profile. Determines the linetype used for integer the skin section profile. Determines the line thickness integer used for the skin section profile. Determines the color of the solid color section profile. Determines the linetype used for integer the solid section profile. Determines the line thickness integer used for the solid section profile. Determines the color of the color detail profile. Determines the linetype used for integer the detail profile. Determines the line thickness integer used for the detail profile. color



Color Break


Breakout

Linetype Thickness

Determines the color of the break profile. Determines the linetype used for integer the break profile. Determines the line thickness integer used for the break profile. Determines the color of the color breakout profile. Determines the linetype used for integer the breakout profile. Determines the line thickness integer used for the breakout profile. color

3DInheritance Parameter Parameter Name Value Color Wireframe Linetype Thickness Color Solid


3D Points Symbol

Description

Specifies whether wireframe color should be inherited from 3D. Specifies whether wireframe linetype should be yes/no inherited from 3D. Specifies whether wireframe thickness should yes/no be inherited from 3D. Specifies whether solid color should be yes/no inherited from 3D. Specifies whether solid linetype should be yes/no inherited from 3D. Specifies whether solid thickness should be yes/no inherited from 3D. Specifies whether 3D points color should be yes/no inherited from 3D. Specifies whether 3D points symbol should be yes/no inherited from 3D. yes/no



GeneratedGeometry Parameter VividEdges

Parameter Name Value Color Linetype Thickness Color

HiddenEdges

Linetype Thickness

Fillets

Wireframe

Color Linetype Thickness Color Linetype Thickness

3DPoints

Symbols

Description

color Determines the color of vivid edges. integer Determines the linetype used for vivid edges. Determines the line thickness used for vivid integer edges. color Determines the color of hidden edges. Determines the linetype used for hidden integer edges. Determines the line thickness used for integer hidden edges. color Determines the color of fillets. integer Determines the linetype used for fillets. integer Determines the line thickness used for fillets. color Determines the color of wireframe. integer Determines the linetype used for wireframe. Determines the line thickness used for integer wireframe. Determines the symbol used for 3D points. integer Use O to inherit from the 3D symbol, use 1 to 8 to choose a custom symbol. [ Back ] [ Up ]


Workbench Description

Workbench Description This section contains the list of the icons and menus specific to Generative Drafting workbench. You may read these pages whenever you require more detailed information on these commands which have been documented in other parts of the guide.

Command Board Menu Bar Toolbars

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/draug_C2/draugwd0000.htm10/20/2004 5:44:13 PM

Command Board

Command (and Option) Board General Grid

Analysis Display Mode

Snap to Point

Show Constraints

Detected Constraints

Filter Generated Elements

Projected/Forced/True Length Dimension

Drawing Sheets New Sheet

New View

New Detail Sheet

Instantiate 2D Component

Frame Creation

Generated Views Front View

View from 3D

Advanced Front View

Quick Detail View

Projection Views

Quick Detail View Profile

Auxiliary View

Detail View

Unfolded View

Detail View Profile

Offset Section View

Clipping View

Offset Section Cut

Clipping View Profile

Aligned Section View

Broken View

Aligned Section Cut

Breakout View

Isometric View

Views via the Wizard


Command Board




Generating Dimensions Generating Dimensions

Generating Dimensions Step by Step

Dimensioning Dimensions

Dimension Edition

Tolerancing

Dimensions

Create Interruption(s)

Datum Feature

Cumulated Dimensions

Remove Interruption(s)

Geometrical Tolerances

Stacked Dimensions

Re-route Dimension

Length/Distance Dimensions

Angle Dimensions

Technological Feature Dimensioning

Radius Dimensions

Technological Feature Dimensions

Diameter Dimensions

Length Technological Feature Dimensions

Chamfer Dimensions

Angle Technological Feature Dimensions

Thread Dimension

Radius Technological Feature Dimensions

Coordinate Dimensions

Diameter Technological Feature Dimensions

Hole Dimension Table Points Coordinates Table


Command Board

Annotations Texts

Symbols

Text

Roughness Symbol

Text with Leader

Welding Symbol

Text Replicate

Geometry Weld

Balloon Datum Target Text Template Placement Table

Dress-up Elements Axis and Threads Center Line (No Reference)

Thread (No Reference)

Center Line (Reference)

Thread (Reference)

Axis Line

Axis Line and Center Line

2D Component Re-use a component from a catalog

Graphic Properties


Command Board

●

line color

Copy Object Format

●

line type

Pattern

●

line weight

Dimension Properties

Line Type one part dimension two part dimension

●

Tolerance type

●

Unit

●

Precision

two part leader

Text Properties

Font Name

Font Size

Bold

Superscript

Italic

Subscript

Underline

Left Justification

Strike-thru

Center Justification

Over-line

Right Justification


Command Board

Anchor point

Frame

Style Style

[ Up ] [ Next ]


Menu Bar

Menu Bar In this chapter we will describe the various menus, submenus and items specific to the Generative Drafting workbench.

File For...

See...

Page Setup...

Defining the Drafting Sheet

Print...


Printer Setup... Printing a Document After Modifying Current Display Settings

Edit For...

See...

Links

Saving and Loading (unresolved link) Saving and Loading (resolved link)

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/draug_C2/draugwd0100.htm (1 of 9)10/20/2004 5:44:47 PM

Menu Bar

Not Aligning a View

Properties

Access and edit information on 2D geometry, dressup elements, annotations and dimensions in a single dialog box

Background

Creating a Frame Title Block

Insert For...

See...

Views

Creating Views

Drawing

Creating Sheets

Dimensioning

Creating Dimensions

Generation

Generating Dimensions

Annotations

Annotations


Menu Bar

Dress Up

Dress-Up Elements

New sheet

Define a Drafting Sheet

New Detail Sheet

Create a 2D component

New View

Create views

Instantiate Detail

Re-use a 2D component


Menu Bar

Dimensions

Create dimensions

Cumulated Dimensions

Create cumulated dimensions

Stacked Dimensions

Create stacked dimensions

Length/Distance Dimensions

Create explicit dimensions

Angle Dimensions


Radius Dimensions


Diameter Dimensions


Chamfer Dimensions

Create chamfer dimensions


Menu Bar

Coordinate Dimensions

Create coordinate dimensions

Create Interruption

Interrupt one or more extension lines

Remove Interruption


Remove all Interruptions


Datum Feature

Create a datum feature

Geometrical Tolerance

Create a geometrical tolerance

Generating Dimensions

Generate dimensions in one shot


Menu Bar

Generating Dimensions Step by Step

Generate dimensions semi-automatically

Balloon generation

Generating Associative Balloons

Bill of material

Add a generative Bill of Material

Text

Create a free text

Text with Leader

Create a text with a leader

Text Replicate

Replicate a text attribute

Balloon

Create a balloon

Datum Target

Create a datum target

Roughness Symbol

Create a roughness symbol

Welding Symbol

Create a welding symbol


Menu Bar

Weld

Create a geometry weld

Center Line

Create center lines (no reference)

Center Line with Reference

Create center lines (reference)

Thread

Create threads (no reference)

Thread

Create threads (reference)

Axis Line

Create axis lines

Axis Line and Center Line

Create axis lines and center lines

Tools For...

Positioning


See...

Further down

Menu Bar

Analyze

Further down

Reset All Defaults

Before You Begin:

Insert File

Exporting and Importing a File

Element Positioning

Modifying annotation positioning

Line-up

Line up dimensions (free space) Line up dimensions (reference)

Dimension Positioning

Position dimensions


Menu Bar

Show Geometry in All Viewpoints


Dimensions Analysis

Analyzing Interfering Dimensions [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]


Toolbars

Generative Drafting Toolbars This section describes the various icons of the Generative Drafting workbench. The toolbars are located on each side of the workbench in the default set-up.

Toolbar

Purpose

Views

Create different kinds of views

Generative View Style

Specify the generative view style that should be used when creating views

Drawing

Create sheets, views, 2D components and frame title blocks

Dimensioning

Create all types of dimensions needed for your drawing


Generate dimensions and balloons

Annotations

Add annotations to existing views by creating them

Dress-Up

Add dress-up elements on the drawing

Tools

Activate display and positioning tools

Tools Palette

Use specific options or value fields available for a given command

Properties Text Properties

Modify the text properties

Graphic Properties

Modify the graphic properties of all kind of features

Dimension Properties

Modify the dimensions properties

Style

Set the style that will be used to create a new object

[ Back ] [ Up ]


Drawing

Drawing

See Manipulating the Drafting Sheet See Creating a 2D Component See Re-using a 2D component See Creating a 2D Component See Add a generative Bill of Material

[ Up ] [ Next ]


Views

Views

See Creating a Front View See Creating an Advanced Front View See Creating an Unfolded View See Creating Projection Views See Creating an Auxiliary View See Creating an Offset Section View/Offset Section Cut See Creating an Offset Section View/Offset Section Cut See Creating an Aligned Section View/Aligned Section Cut See Creating an Aligned Section View/Aligned Section Cut See Creating a Quick Detail View/Quick Detail View Profile


Views

See Creating a Detail View/Detail View Profile See Creating a Detail View/Detail View Profile See Creating a Clipping View See Creating a Clipping View See Creating an Isometric View See Creating a Broken View See Creating a Breakout View See Creating Views via the Wizard See Creating Views via the Wizard



Generative View Style

Generative View Style See Creating a View using Generative View Styles





See Dimensions Generation in One Shot See Semi-automatic Dimension Generation See Generating Balloons

[ Back ] [ Up ]


Customizing for Drafting

Customizing for Drafting These sections explain how to customize settings for Drafting. Customizing for Interactive Drafting Customizing for Generative Drafting

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/bascudr_C2/bascudr0000.htm10/20/2004 5:45:44 PM

Customizing for Interactive Drafting

Customizing for Interactive Drafting This section explains how to customize settings and toolbars for Interactive Drafting. General settings Set general settings to be used in the Interactive Drafting workbench. View and sheet layout settings Customize given options that will be used when creating views or when adding sheets. Geometry creation settings Customize given options that will be used when creating 2D geometry, whether using autodetection (or SmartPick) or not, or still adding constraints to this geometry. Dimension creation settings Customize given options that will be used when creating or re-positioning dimensions. Manipulator settings Visualize given manipulators that will be used when creating or modifying dimensions. Annotation and dress-up settings Customize given options that will be used when creating annotations. Administration settings Customize settings for the management of drawings. Toolbar customization Customize the appearance of properties toolbars.

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/bascudr_C2/bascudri0000.htm10/20/2004 5:46:11 PM

General Settings

General Settings This task shows you how to set general settings to be used in the Interactive Drafting workbench. 1. Select the Tools->Options command. The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click Mechanical Design -> Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. 3. Select the General tab. It contains several categories of options: ● Ruler ●

Grid

●

Rotation

●

Colors

●

Tree

●

View Axis

Ruler

Show ruler Check this option to display the ruler in your sheet. It means you visualize the cursor coordinates as you are drawing.

Grid

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/bascudr_C2/bascudr0002.htm (1 of 5)10/20/2004 5:46:23 PM

General Settings

Display Check this option to display the grid in your session. You will note that this capability is also available via the Drafting Options toolbar. Snap to point You need to check this option if the geometry needs to begin or end on the points of the grid. Allow Distortions Check this option to apply different graduations and spacing between H and V. H; V; Primary spacing; Graduations To define your grid, enter the values of your choice in the H and V fields. The Primary spacing option lets you define the spacing between the major lines of the grid. The Graduations field lets you set the number of graduations between the major lines of the grid, which actually consists in defining a secondary grid.

Rotation

Rotation Snap Angle Specify the angle that should be used when rotating text elements (text, frame, or leader) using snapping. In other words, this option defines the snapping value used when rotating an element using the Select or Rotate commands. Automatic Snapping This option automatically uses snapping when rotating an element.


General Settings

Colors You can customize given options for modifying the drawing background color. You can do this at any time.

Sheet background Choose the color that will be used for the sheet background. Detail background Choose the color that will be used for the background of 2D components. Graduated color If you want the sheet background and/or the detail (i.e. 2D component) background to be graduated, check the associated box. For example, if you customize the color type as shown below:

You will get this result:


General Settings

Tree You can choose whether or not parameters and relations should be displayed in the specification tree.

Display parameters Check this option to display in the specification tree the formula parameters used in the drawing. Display relations Check this option to display in the specification tree the relation parameters used in the drawing.

View axis


General Settings

Display in the current view Check this box if you want the view axis to be displayed when you activate a view. Zoomable Check this box if you want to be able to zoom view axes (as you can do with geometry). Reference size Enter the size that you want to use as a reference to display view axes size. 4. Choose the options you want and then click OK to validate your settings.

[ Up ] [ Next ]


View and Sheet Layout Settings

View and Sheet Layout Settings You can customize given options when creating views or when adding sheets. 1. Select the Tools->Options command. The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click Mechanical Design -> Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. 3. Select the Layout tab. It contains the following sets of options: ● View Creation ●

New Sheet

●

Background View

●

Section / Projection Callout

View creation

View name Check this box if you want the view name to be created automatically when creating views. Scaling factor Check this box if you want the scaling factor to be created automatically when creating views. View frame Check this box if you want the view frame to be created automatically



when creating views. Propagation of broken and breakout specifications Check this box if you want broken and breakout specifications to be reproduced. Auxiliary and section views orientation according to profile You can decide if auxiliary and section views will be oriented according to the profile. In this case, the X axis will be parallel to the profile.

New sheet

Copy background view Check this box if you want a background view to be copied into newly created sheets. Source sheet Specify whether you want the source sheet for the background view to be the first sheet of the current drawing, or a sheet from another drawing by selecting the appropriate option.

Background view



Directory for frame and title block You can specify the path to the directory containing the frame and title block macros.

Section/Projection Callout

Size not dependent on view scale Check this option if you do not want the size of projection and section callout elements to be dependent on the view scale. This option will apply to newly created callouts, i.e. selecting this option will not have any impact on new callouts. 4. Choose the options you want and then click OK to validate your settings.



Geometry Creation Settings

Geometry Creation You can customize given options when creating 2D geometry, either or not using autodetection (or SmartPick), or still adding constraints to this geometry. 1. Select the Tools->Options command. The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click Mechanical Design -> Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. 3. Select the Geometry tab. It contains several categories of options: ● Geometry ●

Constraints creation

●

Constraints Display

●

Colors

Geometry

Create circle and ellipse centers You can decide whether or not you want to create centers when creating circles or ellipses. By default, this option is activated. Just uncheck it if you do not need to create circle and ellipse centers. Allow direct manipulation Select this option to be able to move geometry using the mouse. When moving geometry, you can move either the minimum number of elements, the maximum number of elements, or still the minimum number by modifying the shape of elements, if needed. Click the Solving mode... button to configure manipulation.



The dialog box that appears offers the following options as regards the solving mode: Solving mode for moving elements Standard mode You move as many elements as possible and also respect existing constraints. Minimum move You move as few elements as possible and also respect existing constraints. Relaxation You move elements by re-distributing them over the sketch, globally speaking. This method solves element moving by minimizing energy cost. Drag elements end points included Furthermore, you can choose to drag elements along with their end points by checking this box.



Show H and V fields in the Tools Palette You can show the H and V fields in the Tools Palette when creating 2D geometry or when offsetting elements. Leaving the option unchecked enables you to directly enter the value corresponding to the type of element you are creating: for example, the length when creating a line, the radius when creating a circle or the offset value when offsetting elements. When a command (such as the Point creation command) does not have any parameters other than H and V, then these two fields will remain in the Tools Palette, whether you select this option or not.

Create end points when duplicating generated geometry When duplicating geometry that was generated from the 3D, you can choose to create end points for these geometrical elements.

Constraints creation

Create detected and feature-based constraints Select this option if you want to create the geometrical or dimensional constraints detected by the SmartPick tool. If all of the detection options are unchecked, the Create detected and feature-based constraints option is not available. If this detection option is unchecked, the Create detected constraints option will be inactive by default in the Tools toolbar. You will be able to activate it at any time. SmartPick... (switch button) As you create more and more elements, SmartPick detects multiple directions and positions, and more and more relationships with existing elements. This may lead to confusion due to the rapid highlighting of



several different detection possibilities as you point the cursor at different elements in rapid succession. Consequently, you can decide to filter out undesired detections by clicking the SmartPick... button.

The SmartPick dialog box provides these options: ● Support lines and circles ●

Alignment

●

Parallelism, perpendicularity and tangency

●

Horizontality and verticality

Uncheck the elements you do not wish to detect when sketching. Disabling SmartPick completely (i.e. unchecking all options in the SmartPick dialog box) is particularly useful when your screen is full of elements: in this case, it may be a good idea to disable SmartPick to concentrate only on the geometry.

Constraints Display



Display constraints Check this option to visualize the logical constraints specific to the elements. Note that if the Display constraints option is unchecked, the other options in this category are not available. Reference size Specify the size that will be used as a reference to display constraints symbols. Changing this reference size will modify the size of all constraints representations. Constraints color Choose the color that will be used to display constraints. Constraints types... (switch button) Click this button to define which types of constraints you will visualize as you create the geometry.



The Constraints types dialog box provides these options: ● Horizontal ●

Vertical

●

Parallelism

●

Perpendicularity

●

Concentricity

●

Coincidence

●

Tangency

●

Symmetry

Uncheck the types of constraints you do not want to visualize as you create the geometry.

Colors

Two types of colors may be applied to sketched elements. These two types of colors correspond to colors illustrating: ● Graphical properties Colors that can be modified. These colors can therefore be modified using the Tools->Options dialog box. OR ●

Constraint diagnosis Colors that represent constraint diagnoses are colors that are imposed to elements whatever the graphical properties previously assigned to these elements and in accordance with given diagnoses. As a result, as soon as the diagnosis is solved, the element is assigned the color as defined in the Tools->Options dialog box.

Visualization of diagnosis Select this option if you want over-constrained, inconsistent, notchanged or iso-constrained elements to be identified using specific colors. Then, click the Colors... button to configure these colors.



In the dialog box that appears, you can configure colors for the following types of elements: Over-constrained elements The dimensioning scheme is over-constrained: too many dimensions were applied to the geometry. Inconsistent elements At least one dimension value needs to be changed. This is also the case when elements are under-constrained and the system proposes defaults that do not lead to a solution. Not-changed elements Some geometrical elements are over-defined or not-consistent. As a result, geometry that depend(s) on the problematic area will not be recalculated. Iso-constrained elements All the relevant dimensions are satisfied. The geometry is fixed and cannot be moved from its geometrical support. Other color of the elements Click the Colors... button to configure the colors of other elements.



In the dialog box that appears, you can configure colors for the following types of elements: Isolated elements Use-edge (projection, intersection, etc.) that does not depend on the 3D anymore. Protected elements Non-modifiable elements. Construction elements A construction element is an element that is internal to, and only visualized by, the sketch. This element is used as positioning reference. It is not used for creating solid primitives. SmartPick Colors used for SmartPick assistant elements and symbols. When opening a drawing, colors are not recomputed. Colors will not be displayed until you create another element or move the geometry.

4. Choose the options you want and then click OK to validate your settings.



Dimension Creation

Dimension Creation You can customize given options when creating or re-positioning dimensions. 1. Select the Tools->Options command. The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click Mechanical Design -> Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. 3. Select the Dimension tab. It contains several categories of options: ● Dimension Creation ●

Move

●

Line-Up

●


Dimension Creation


Dimension Creation

Dimension following the mouse (ctrl toggles) You can decide that the dimension line is positioned according to the cursor, following it dynamically during the creation process. Constant offset between dimension line and geometry The distance between the created dimension and the geometry remains the same when you move the geometry. Default dimension line/geometry distance If you position the dimension according to the cursor, you can define the value at which the dimension is created. If you create associativity between the dimension and the geometry, you can define the value at which the dimension will remain positioned. Associativity on 3D If you click the switch button, the Dimensions associativity on 3D dialog box appears. A link can be applied between a dimension and the 3D part. As a result, when you update the drawing, the dimension is automatically recomputed. If you do not check this option, when you perform the update, you need to re-create the dimension afterwards.

Create driving dimensions The dimensions you will create will drive the geometry.


Dimension Creation

A new field will appear in the Tools Palette during the creation process, allowing you to enter the driving dimension value.

Detect chamfer Automatically detects chamfers so that you can create chamfer dimensions in a single click. As chamfer detection may slow performance down, you may want to deactivate this option for large products or assemblies. By default, create dimensions on circle's Specify whether the dimension you will create between a circle and another element should be on the circle center or on the circle edge.

Move

Activate Snapping (shift toggles) Select to activate the snapping option. Click the Configure button. In the dialog box, specify whether the dimension should be snapped on the grid, or whether the dimension value should be located at its default position between symbols (it will work only if the cursor is between the symbols), or both.


Dimension Creation

Pressing the Shift key allows you to temporarily deactivate or activate this mode. Move only selected sub-part Activate this option if you want to move only a dimension sub-part (text, line, etc.).

Line-Up

You can organize dimensions into a system with a linear offset. The offset will align the dimensions to each other as well as the smallest dimension to the reference element. Default offset to reference This allows you to set the offset between the smallest dimension and the reference element. Default offset between dimensions This allows you to set the offset between dimensions.


Dimension Creation

Align stacked dimension values Lets you align all the values of a group of stacked dimensions on the value of the smallest dimension of the group. Align cumulated dimension values Lets you align all the values of a group of cumulated dimensions on the value of the smallest dimension of the group. Automatically add a funnel Whenever the value of a cumulated dimension requires a funnel to be displayed correctly, lets you have one added automatically.


Activate analysis display mode Colors can be customized with this option. To activate this mode, select this option and then click the Types and colors button. The Types and colors of dimensions dialog box lets you assign the desired color(s) to the selected dimension types. You will then be able to visualize the different types of dimensions using their assigned colors.


Dimension Creation




Manipulators Settings

Manipulators These options apply to the Interactive Drafting workbench only. You can decide that you will visualize given manipulators whenever creating or modifying dimensions. 1. Select the Tools->Options command. The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click Mechanical Design -> Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. 3. Select the Manipulators tab. It contains several categories of options: ● Manipulators ●

Dimension Manipulators

Manipulators

These settings can be used for any type of manipulator (texts, leaders, center lines, dimensions and so forth). Reference size Specify the reference size that should be used for manipulators. In the case of texts, for example, this reference size corresponds to the diameter of the rotation manipulators.

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/bascudr_C2/bascudri0006.htm (1 of 4)10/20/2004 5:46:57 PM


Zoomable Check this box if you want to make manipulators zoomable.

Dimension Manipulators

These settings let you define which manipulators you will visualize and therefore use when creating and/or modifying dimensions:



Modify overrun If you drag select one overrun manipulator, both overrun extension lines are modified. To modify only the selected overrun extension line, use the Ctrl key. You can also double-click on the manipulator and enter the new value in the dialog box that appears. Modify blanking If you drag select one blanking manipulator, both blanking are modified. To modify only the selected blanking, use the Ctrl key. You can also double-click on the manipulator and enter the new value in the dialog box that appears. Insert text before Allow inserting a text before, without using the Properties dialog box. For this, you will click on the manipulator and enter the new text in the dialog box that appears. Insert text after Allows inserting a text after, without using the Properties dialog box. For this, you will click on the manipulator and enter the new text in the dialog box that appears. Move value Allows moving the dimension value and only it. Move dimension line Allows moving the dimension line and only it by dragging to the new location. Move dimension line secondary part Allows moving the dimension line secondary part and only it by dragging to the new location. 4. Choose the options you want and then click OK to validate your settings.





Annotation and Dress-up Settings

Annotation and Dress-up You can customize given options that will be used when creating annotations. 1. Select the Tools->Options command. The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click Mechanical Design -> Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. 3. Select the Annotation and Dress-Up tab. It contains the following sets of options: ● Annotation Creation ●

Move

●

2D Component Creation

●

Balloon Creation

Annotation Creation

In order for these options to be taken into account, the Activate Snapping (SHIFT toggles) box must be checked. Note that the option selected in the Activate snapping dialog box will be taken into account. See the Move section. Create text along reference Select this option if you want to create annotation texts along a reference direction. For example, if you select a line when creating a text, the text will be oriented parallel to the line. Text Select this option if you want to create the extremity of text leaders http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/bascudr_C2/bascudr0007.htm (1 of 3)10/20/2004 5:47:02 PM


normal to a reference direction. For example, if you select a line when creating a text with leader, the leader will be normal to the line. Geometrical tolerance Select this option if you want to create the extremity of geometrical tolerance leaders normal to a reference direction. For example, if you select a line when creating a geometrical tolerance, the leader will be normal to the line.

Move

Activate Snapping (SHIFT toggles) Select this option to activate snapping. Click the Configure button. In the dialog box that appears, specify whether you want the annotation to be snapped on the grid, according to the orientation, or both. This will apply to the annotations selected in the Annotation Creation area. To deactivate snapping when creating or moving annotations, press the Shift key.

2D Component Creation



Create with a constant size Select this option if you want all 2D component instances to have the same size when you create them, no matter what the view scale is. This lets you create 2D component instances whose size is independent from the view scale so that they always look the same. You can use them as symbols, for example. If you want to use as symbols 2D components with text, activate both the Create with a constant size setting and the Apply Scale property for the text (in Edit -> Properties): the size of both the 2D component and its text will then be independent from the view scale.

Balloon Creation

3D associativity You can specify what kind of balloons you want to create (using the Balloon command from the Annotation toolbar) or to generate (using the Generate Balloons command from the Generation toolbar). First, select the 3D associativity box to indicate that you want to associate balloons with information from the 3D. Then, select from the list the kind of balloons you want to create or generate: the numbering of parts within an assembly (default option), the instance name or the part number. 4. Choose the options you want and then click OK to validate your settings.



Administration

Administration Settings You can customize settings for the management of drawings. 1. Select the Tools -> Options command. The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click Mechanical Design -> Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. 3. Select the Administration tab. It contains the following sets of options: ● Drawing management ●

Style

●


●

Dress-up

Drawing management

Prevent File>New Check this box to make it impossible to create drawings using the File > New command. All drawings will be created using the File -> New From... command instead. Prevent switch of standard Check this box to make it impossible to change standards, i.e. to use a standard other than the one currently defined in the Page Setup dialog box. Prevent update of standard


Administration

Check this box to make it impossible to update standards for the current document in the Page Setup dialog box. Prevent background view access Check this box to make it impossible to access the background view.

Style

Use style values to create new objects Check this box if you want dialog boxes, Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette to be pre-filled with custom style values (as defined in the Standards Editor) when creating new annotations. In this case, Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette will be disabled during the creation of the annotation. If you leave this box unchecked, annotation dialog boxes, Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette will be pre-filled with the last entered values (except for Texts, Texts with leader, Balloons and Datum features). In this case, Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette will be active during the creation of the annotation. If you check this box, you will be able to reset the current style values in dialog boxes at any time using the Reset button.


Administration

Create new sheet from This setting lets you specify if the properties used for creating new sheets should be those defined in the standards or those defined in the first sheet in a drawing. These properties are the scale and the projection method (first or third angle). Select Style if you want the sheet to use the style defined in the standards (in Tools -> Standards -> Drafting -> [StandardName] > Styles -> Sheet). Select First sheet if you want the sheet to use the properties defined in the first sheet in a drawing. For example, you can use this option if you use an existing drawing to create a new one (i.e. when you want the new drawing to have the same properties as the existing drawing). Lock "User Default" Style Check this box to make it compulsory to use User Defaults (i.e., userdefined values set as default). The Styles drop-down list will be set to Only User Defaults and will be inactive so that Original Defaults or User Defaults cannot be selected. This option applies only to drawings created with versions up to V5 R10 whose standard has NOT been updated or changed in V5 R11 and later. Prevent "Set As Default" and "Reset All Defaults" Check this box to use the current defaults and to make it impossible to create, change and reset user defaults (i.e. user-defined values). This disables the Set as Default and the Reset All Defaults commands. This option applies only to drawings created with versions up to V5 R10 whose standard has NOT been updated or changed in V5 R11 and later.



Administration

Prevent generative view style creation Check this box if you do not want to use generative view styles when creating views. In this case, you will not be able to select a generative view style after having selected a view creation command, which means that the Generative View Style toolbar will not be displayed. (In the case of advanced front views, it is the Generative view style list in the View Parameters dialog box which will not be displayed).

Dress-up

Prevent dimensions from driving 3D constraints Check this box to make it impossible to modify a 3D constraint via a 2D dimension that was generated from it. 4. Choose the options you want and then click OK to validate your settings.



Toolbars

Customizing Toolbars You can customize the appearance of some fields in the following properties toolbars: Styles, Graphic Properties, Text Properties, Dimension Properties.

1. Right-click the toolbar field you want to customize. A contextual menu is displayed. 2. If necessary, scroll down this contextual menu to display the toolbar customization options.

The customization options that you can apply to the selected field are displayed.

The options available depend on the selected field. For more information on what options will be available for each field, see the table below. 3. Click the option you want. Depending on the option you selected, the corresponding dialog box appears. 4. Enter the appropriate value in the dialog box.


Toolbars

●

●

●

●

●

Set text width: sets the width used to display the field in the toolbar, in number of characters to be displayed (based on 'W'). Set list width: sets the width used to display the drop-down list, in number of characters to be displayed (based on 'W'). Set list height: sets the height used to display the list, in number of lines to be displayed (up and down arrows will make it possible to scroll within the list). Icons display: defines whether icons should be displayed in this field, or only in the list, when the list is collapsed. Precision: sets the precision used to display a numerical value in this field, in number of digits after the separator.

5. Click OK to validate.

The table below indicates which fields you can customize in each toolbar, along with what you can customize for each field. Set text width

Set list width

Set list height

Icons display

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Set precision

Style toolbar

Style

Yes

Text Properties toolbar Font Name

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Font Size

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Dimension Properties toolbar Tolerance Description

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Tolerance

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Numerical Display Description

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Precision

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Graphic Properties toolbar Color

Yes

No

No

No

No

Thickness

Yes

No

Yes

No

No


Toolbars

Linetype

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

Point type

Yes

No

Yes

No

No


Customizing for Generative Drafting

Customizing for Generative Drafting This section explains how to customize settings for Generative Drafting. General settings Set general settings to be used in the Generative Drafting workbench. View and sheet layout settings Customize given options that will be used when creating views or when adding sheets. View generation settings Customize given geometry, dress-up and view generation options that will be used when generating views. Generation settings Customize given options for controlling dimension and annotation generation. Geometry creation settings Customize given options that will be used when creating 2D geometry, whether using autodetection (or SmartPick)or not, or still adding constraints to this geometry. Dimension creation settings Customize given options that will be used when creating or re-positioning dimensions. Manipulator settings Visualize given manipulators that will be used whenever creating or modifying dimensions. Annotation and dress-up settings Customize given options that will be used when creating annotations. Administration settings Customize settings for the management of drawings. Toolbar customization Customize the appearance of properties toolbars.

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/bascudr_C2/bascudra0000.htm10/20/2004 5:47:33 PM

View Generation Settings

View Generation Settings You can customize given options for controlling geometry and dress-up behavior when generating views, as well as view generation.

1. Select the Tools->Options command. The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click Mechanical Design -> Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. 3. Select the View tab. It contains several categories of options: ● Geometry generation / Dress-up ●

View generation

Geometry generation / Dress-up



This category of options lets you specify what kind of geometry and dress-up elements you want to generate when generating views. Generate axis Select to generate axis lines. Generate threads Select this option to generate threads. Generate center lines Select this option to generate center lines. Generate hidden lines Select this option to generate hidden lines. Generate fillets Select this option to generate fillets. Additionally, click the Configure button to configure fillets generation. You can choose to generate either of the following types of fillets: Boundaries Thin lines, representing the mathematical limits of the fillets. Boundaries will not be projected if they correspond to two faces which are continuous in curvature. They will be projected only if they correspond to a smooth edge which is situated between two faces whose curvature radii vary. This mode will be used automatically to represent a connection between two faces which are not joined by a fillet, no matter what option you select.



Symbolic Original edges, projected in a direction that is normal to each corresponding surface.

Approximated Original Edges Original edges, at the intersection of the two surfaces joined by the fillet.

Projected Original Edges Original edges, projected on fillet surfaces in the direction of the view projection.

This projection mode is equivalent to the CATIA V4 fillet projection mode. Inherit 3D colors Select this option if you want the colors of a part to be automatically generated onto the views. In the case of parts whose color is white, the views generated with this option selected will be white, and will therefore not be properly displayed.

Project 3D Wireframe Select this option to visualize both the wireframe and the geometry on generated views. Additionally, click the Configure button to configure the 3D wireframe projection mode. You can choose whether projected 3D wireframe can be hidden (in some cases, depending on the projection angle, part or all of 3D wireframe will possibly be hidden) or is always visible (3D wireframe will be visible in all cases, independently of the projection angle).



Project 3D Points Select this option to project points from 3D (no construction element). Additionally, click the Configure button to select the type of points visualized in the projected drawing. In the 3D Point Projection dialog box, you can choose between keeping the symbols that are used in the 3D or using a new symbol.

Apply 3D specification Select this option to specify that, in an assembly, given parts will or will not be sectioned into section views or breakout views (Generative Drafting workbench). For this, you select one view, then the Edit -> Properties command from the menu bar from the Assembly Design workbench (Mechanical tab, Drafting properties options) and either activate or deactivate the Not cut in section views options.

View Linetype Click the Configure button to configure linetypes for specific types of views: section view, detail view, broken view, breakout view, skin section view (in the case of wireframes and surfaces). In the Linetype and Thickness dialog box, select the line type and the thickness you want for each type of view, from the associated fields. Click Close when you are done.



If you choose the zigzag linetype (linetype #8), note that this linetype is just a graphical dress-up of the view. This means that if one line is relimited on the breakout line, then it will be relimited on the theoretical line as shown here, and not on the visualized zigzag line.

View generation



View generation mode From this list, select how you want to generate views. Exact view Generates exact views from the Design mode, i.e. views for which the geometry is available. The exact generation mode will be the best option in most cases: ● This is the fastest generation mode. ●

All types of views can be generated using this option.

●

All functionalities (dress-up, dimensions, annotations, etc.) are available.

However, there are a few cases in which choosing the exact generation mode will not be appropriate: ● In the case of sophisticated products or assemblies involving large amounts of data, generating exact views may consume too much memory. ●

Polyhedral elements (such as dittos, surfaces, etc.) from V4 .model documents are not supported.

CGR Generates views using the CGR format (CATIA Graphical Representation). CGR corresponds to a data format containing a graphical representation of the geometry only, which is available with the Visualization mode (as opposed to the exact geometry, which is available with the Design mode). With CGR, only the external appearance of the component is used and displayed; the geometry is not available. The corresponding .cgr file, if it exists, is inserted from the cache system. CGR views are not as high in quality as exact views, but they consume much less memory during the generation. This may be useful when dealing with sophisticated products or assemblies involving large amounts of data. However, this generation mode is rather slow. For more information about the advantages and restrictions associated with the CGR generation mode, see Advantages and restrictions common to CGR and Approximate modes below.



Approximate You can now generate views in Approximate mode. Although Approximate views are not as high in precision and quality as exact views, this generation mode dramatically reduces memory consumption. Performances may also be improved, depending on how you fine-tune precision. Therefore, the Approximate mode is particularly well-adapted to sophisticated products or assemblies involving large amounts of data. The Approximate mode offers about the same advantages and restrictions than the CGR generation mode (see above). However, there are some differences: ● Approximate consumes even less memory than CGR. ●

●

Approximate is faster than CGR, but performances largely depend on fine-tuning. Approximate provides more approximate results than CGR, but these results largely depend on how you fine-tune precision.

You can fine-tune the generation options according to your needs. Click the Configure button. In the dialog box, move the cursor to set the precision (i.e. the level of detail) with respect to the performances (i.e. generation time). The higher the precision, the lower the performances, and vice-versa. In any case, memory consumption will not be impacted. Click Close when you are done. For more information about the advantages and restrictions associated with the Approximate generation mode, see Advantages and restrictions common to CGR and Approximate modes just below. Advantages and restrictions common to CGR and Approximate Using CGR or Approximate to generate views offers the following advantages: ● Optimize memory consumption when generating and handling projection views for large products or assemblies. ●

Generate views from third-party data (such as MultiCAD), as well as from polyhedral elements (such as dittos, surfaces, etc.) in V4 .model documents.

However, the CGR or Approximate generation mode involves a number of restrictions: ● You cannot generate section views, section cuts, detail views, detail view profile, breakout views, unfolded views and views from 3D.


View Generation Settings ●

●

●

●

You cannot project 3D elements such as wireframe, points, etc. on CGR or Approximate views. CGR or Approximate views cannot contain dress-up elements (axis, center lines, threads). Auxiliary view profiles, annotations, dimensions, etc. are not associative on CGR or Approximate views. CGR or Approximate views being only a graphical representation of the geometry, only line segments are generated in such views. As dimensions are not associative, the only elements that can be dimensioned are these line segments. As a result, it is impossible to create certain types of radius or diameter dimensions in such views; to put it simply, you cannot create radius and diameter dimensions on elements other than these line segments.

As a consequence of these restrictions, selecting either the CGR or the Approximate option disables a number of other options on the View and on the Generation tab. Raster Generates views as images. This enables you to quickly generate overall views for large products or assemblies, regardless of drawing quality. Such views are associative to the 3D geometry and can be updated when the part or product changes. Raster views offer a number of restrictions: ● You cannot generate the following types of views using this option: view from 3D, section views, section cuts, detail views, breakout views, unfolded views. ●

● ●

●

Raster views cannot contain dress-up elements (axis, center lines, threads). Creating dimensions is impossible. Generally speaking, all commands requiring the selection of geometry are not available. Raster views cannot be edited (you can work around this by isolating the view: double-clicking the image will then launch an image editor).

As a consequence of these restrictions, selecting this option disables a number of other options on the View and on the Generation tab.



To optimize disk space and memory consumption, it is recommended that you do not select the Inherit 3D colors option when generating views as images. Click the Configure button to configure the raster mode options. From the Mode list, select the mode that you want to use: Dynamic Hidden Line Removal, Shading, Shading with edges. These modes are equivalent to the 3D rendering styles. For more information, refer to Using Rendering Styles in the Infrastructure User's Guide. Now, set the level of detail (i.e. the definition, in dpi) that will respectively be used to visualize and to print the drawing. You can choose between three pre-defined modes (Low quality, Normal quality and High quality) and a custom mode (Customize). If you choose to customize the definition yourself, set the dpi for visualization and for print in the appropriate fields. Click Close when you are done.

The level of detail applies to the scale of the view. In some cases (when the view would print with a considerable height or width), there may be too many pixels to generate the view. In this case, the view will be displayed as a red cross-mark. If this happens, try to reduce the scale of the view and/or the level of detail. If you want the colors of a part to be used when generating Raster views using the Shading or Shading with edges mode, remember to select the Inherit 3D Colors option. Otherwise, the view will be generated using shades of grey.



To further improve performance when generating Raster or CGR views, we recommend you work in Visualization mode: to do this, in the Options dialog box, go to Infrastructure -> Product Structure -> Cache Management tab and select Work with the cache system. (For more information, see Customizing Cache Settings in the Infrastructure User's Guide and Visualization mode in the Product Structure User's Guide.)

Exact preview for view generation Make sure this option is selected if you want an exact preview when generating views. As a result, the part or product will be loaded in Design mode when previewing the view to generate, even if you are working in Visualization mode. Deselect this option to get a quick preview of the 3D document when generating views. In this case, a part or product open in Visualization mode will not be loaded in Design mode for the preview, which optimizes memory consumption.

Only generate parts larger than To specify that you only want to generate parts which are larger than a certain size, select this option and indicate the appropriate size by providing a value in millimeters in the appropriate field.

Enable occlusion culling Select this option if you want to save memory when generating exact views from an assembly which is loaded in Visualization mode (i.e. when the Work with the cache system option is active). This will load only the parts which will be seen in the resulting view (instead of loading all of them, which is the case by default), which optimizes memory consumption and CPU usage. To ensure the efficiency of this option, make sure that the Exact preview for view generation option is not selected. In the case of an assembly which is loaded in Design mode, or in the case of a part, the Enable occlusion culling option will help increase performance by reducing CPU usage.



Keep the following restrictions in mind when selecting the Enable occlusion culling option: ● The Project 3D points option will be disabled. ●

●

The only option available for Project 3D wireframe is Can be hidden. If you choose to project 3D wireframe, you will need to make sure that your wireframe elements have been taken into account when the CGR data was created: this is the case if you activated the Save lineic elements in cache option from Tools -> Options -> General -> Display -> Performances before the creation of CGR data (i.e. before you launched the part or product in Visualization mode). If not, you need to activate the Save lineic elements in cache option and then recreate the CGR data. To do this: 1. Close all open parts and products and exit the application. 2. Delete your CGR data from the cache. (The cache location is specified in Tools -> Options -> Infrastructure -> Product Structure -> Cache Management tab, Path to the local cache field.) 3. Re-open the product in Visualization mode.


These options are also available in the Properties dialog box for each view: from the contextual menu, click Properties, click the View tab and then select the desired options.



Generation

Generation You can customize given options for controlling dimension and balloon generation in generative views. 1. Select the Tools->Options command. The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click Mechanical Design -> Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. 3. Select the Generation tab. It contains several categories of options: ● Dimension generation ●

Balloon generation

Dimension generation

Generated dimensions are positioned according to the most representative views. In other words, a dimension will appear on a view so that it does not need to be created on another view. The dimensions are generated on the views on the condition the settings were previously switched to the dimension generation option. Generate dimensions when updating the sheet Check this option to generate dimensions automatically each time you update the sheet. Filters before generation


Generation

Check this option to display the Dimension Generation Filters dialog box before generation. This enables you to specify what type of dimensions you want to generate. Also, in assembly or product views, this lets you indicate what parts you want to generate dimensions for. Automatic positioning after generation Check this option if you want the dimensions to be automatically positioned after generation. Allow automatic transfer between views Check this option if you want dimensions to be automatically transferred to the most appropriate view when regenerating dimensions. Analysis after generation Check this option to display the Generated Dimension Analysis dialog box after generation. Generate dimensions from parts included in assembly views Check this option to extract 3D part constraints (on top of assembly constraints) when generating product dimensions. This option is particularly useful if you want to generate dimensions for all parts included in assembly or product views, without displaying the Dimension Generation Filters dialog box before dimension generation. Note that if you display the Dimension Generation Filters dialog box before generating dimensions, you will need to indicate what parts you want to generate dimensions for (whether this option is selected or not). Delay between generations for step-by-step mode Specify the delay between each dimension generation when generating dimensions step by step.

Balloon generation


Generation

Creation of a balloon for each instance of a product If you select this option, a balloon will be generated for each instance of a component: therefore, if a component is used two times within a product, then the balloon will be generated twice. If you leave this box unselected, a single balloon will be generated for all instances of the same component, when a component is used several times within a part or product. 4. Choose the options you want and then click OK to validate your settings.



Glossary

Glossary A absolute position active view

aligned section view

approximate mode

associative detail view associativity attribute auxiliary view

A sheet coordinates. A view from which you create any element: another view or 2D dress-up. The view from which section views, section cuts and detail views will be created. This view generally corresponds to either the front view or the isometric view. A section view created from a cutting profile defined from non parallel planes. In order to include in a section certain angled elements, the cutting plane may be bent so as to pass through those features. The plane and feature are then imagined to be revolved into the original plane. One of the various modes that can be used to generate views. The Approximate mode is particularly well-adapted to sophisticated products or assemblies involving large amounts of data. Although Approximate views are not as high in precision and quality as exact views, this generation mode dramatically reduces memory consumption and performances may also be improved. A detail view associated with a 3D element. In the Drafting workbench, the ability of child view(s) to follow the behavior of the parent view: moving, scaling. In the Drafting workbench, the graphical and/or geometrical properties inherited from 3D element. A view in a direction not necessarily vertical or horizontal. In order to show the true shapes, it is necessary to assume a direction of sight perpendicular to planes that are perpendicular of the curves. This auxiliary view, together with the top view, completely describes the object.

B background sheet background view

A sheet dedicated to frames and title blocks. A sheet dedicated to frames and title blocks.

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/draug_C2/drauggl.htm (1 of 6)10/20/2004 5:49:30 PM

Glossary

back-clipping

bill of material breakout

broken view

A back-clipping removes all the elements behind a predefined plane. It can only be applied on an extracted view. Aback-clipping plane is a plane used for generating a backclipping. A piece of information inserted into the active view of a CATDrawing document. For this, you can be either in the working view or in the background view. A breakout is a partially removed section which allows visualizing a particular element in the view. A breakout view is one not in direct projection from the view containing the cutting profile. In other words, it is not positioned in agreement with the standard arrangement of views. A breakout view is often a partial section. A view that allows shortening an elongated object, using two profiles corresponding to the part to be broken from the view extremities.

C callout CGR mode

child view clipped view clipping profile cross hatching cut area cutting profile

A graphical representation of a cutting profile. One of the various modes that can be used to generate views. CGR (CATIA Graphical Representation) corresponds to a data format containing a graphical representation of the geometry only, which is available with the Visualization mode (as opposed to the exact geometry, which is available with the Design mode). CGR views are not as high in quality as exact views, but they consume much less memory during the generation. This may be useful when dealing with sophisticated products or assemblies involving large amounts of data. A view generated from a parent view. A view modified via a clipping profile. A zone to be kept and visualized in a view. A symbolic representation in the form of a pattern used to display a cut area. The cut surfaces on a section view or section cut. A set of planes used to define a section view or section cut.

D datum feature datum target

An element defining a contacting surface on a part. An element defining a contacting surface on a part and represented by spherical or pointed locating pins.


Glossary

design tree

Area of the document window reserved for viewing the design specifications of a drawing, presented in the form of a tree structure. A view corresponding to a zoomed particular area to be visualized. This area to be visualized is defined by a circle or a given polygon. This view is computed using a boolean operator from the 3D The root feature. Sheets are aggregated in the drawing. Views are aggregated in the sheets. A graphical attribute of a 2D element.

detail view

drawing dress-up

E One of the various modes that can be used to generate views. Exact views are generated from the Design mode, i. e. they are views for which the geometry is available.

exact view

F A view that is extracted from a 3D part that is assigned 3D tolerance specifications and annotations. filter A restriction on elements to be cut in a section view or section cut, or elements to be seen in a projection view. first angle projection method An orthographic representation of the views comprising the arrangement, around the principal view of an object, of some of all of the other five views of that object. With reference to the principal view, the other views are arranged as follows: the view from above is placed underneath, the view from below is placed above, the view from the left is placed on the right and then the view from the rear is placed on the left or on the right, as convenient. (Ref. No. ISO 10209-2:1993) A plane of projection upon which the front view is frontal plane projected. front view A projection view obtained by drawing perpendiculars from all points on the edges of the part to the plane of projection. The plane of projection upon which the front view is projected is called the frontal plane. FD&T view

G generative view style

A set of pre-defined parameters and options which let you customize the appearance and behavior of a generated view.


Glossary

I isometric view

A 3D view that represents a part according to a given projection plane. This view allows a perspective visualization. To produce an isometric projection (isometric means "equal measure"), it is necessary to place the object so that its principal edges make equal angles with the plane of projection and are therefore foreshortened equally.

L lock

A locked view is a view in which any graphical modification of the generated 2D elements is forbidden.

M main view

The view which supports the geometry directly created in the sheet.

O object

offset section view /cut

overlay

In the Drafting workbench, there are two kinds of object: activated and selected. The view frame of an activated object is displayed in red. A section view created from a cutting profile defined with several parallel planes. In sectioning through irregular objects, it is often desirable to show several features that do not lie in a straight line by offsetting or bending the cutting plane. In a multi-model context, all passive elements are called overlayed elements.

P parent view

part

A reference view from which another view is generated (for example a front view from which a section view will be created). The view frame of the parent view is displayed in red. Typically the front view is a parent view. See also child view. A 3D entity obtained by combining different features in the Part Design workbench.


Glossary

pattern projection view

A graphical representation used to represent a sectioned/ cut part. A same representation is used for the different parts of the resulting section or section view. A view conceived to be drawn or projected onto planes known as planes of projection. A transparent plane or pane of glass representing a plane of projection is located parallel to the front surfaces of the part.

Q quick detail view

A view corresponding to a zoomed particular area to be visualized. This area to be visualized is defined by a circle or a given polygon. This view is directly computed from the 2D projection.

R raster mode

One of the various modes that can be used to generate views. The raster mode generates views as images.

S section cut section profile section view

simple breakout

sheet standard

A view representing the intersection between the 3D geometry and the cutting profile. See cutting profile. In the Drafting workbench, a view representing the intersection between the 3D geometry and the cutting profile, and all the 3D geometry located behind the cutting profile. A simple breakout removes locally a sectioned part perpendicularly to the current view plane. You will then be able to visualize the remaining visible inside part. A set of views. Several sheets may be created in the Drafting workbench. The international conventions that are supported in the Drafting workbench: ANSI, ISO and JIS.

T template

In the Drafting workbench, an object that is included in the document (for example, the title block).


Glossary

An orthographic representation of the views comprising the arrangement, around the principal view of an object, of some of all of the other five views of that object. With reference to the principal view, the other views are third angle projection method arranged as follows: the view from above is placed above, the view from below is placed underneath, the view from the left is placed on the left and the view from the rear is placed on the left or on the right, as convenient. (Ref. No. ISO 10209-2:1993) title block A frame which contains the title block.

U unspec breakout unfolded view

An unspec breakout operation removes locally a 3D part. It allows visualizing the inside of a 3D part. It can only be applied to an extracted view. A projected view that is created from a Sheet Metal part in order to include in a section certain angled elements. As a result, the cutting plane may be bent so as to pass through those features.

V A square or rectangular frame that contains the geometry and dimensions of the view.

view frame

W wizard

An assistant for views to be automatically generated once the CATDrawing document is opened. These views can then be modified as if they had been manually created one after the other.


Index

Index

Symbols .model

Numerics 2D component creation (annotation and dress-up settings) 2D components editing instance properties 2D geometry, editing feature properties 2D/3D associativity 3D constraints driving via dimensions generating dimensions from

A active view adding leaders to annotations administration settings advanced search aligned section cuts, creating aligned section views, creating aligning views analysis display mode (dimension settings) analyzing generated dimensions interfering dimensions

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/draug_C2/draugix.htm (1 of 25)10/20/2004 5:49:45 PM

Index

angle dimensions, creating annotation creation (annotation and dress-up settings) annotation settings annotations adding leaders editing properties handling leaders modifying positioning overview positioning leader breakpoints querying links Approximate views area fills arrows associated text, creating associative balloons, creating associative thread dimensions, creating associativity (2D/3D) attributes replicating for texts Autocad2000 axis lines creating creating with center lines

B background view (view and sheet layout settings) background views, managing balloon creation (annotation and dress-up settings) balloon generation (generation settings) balloons creating


Index

creating associative balloons generating on a view modifying batch, updating drawings Best Practices DXF/DWG Small Entities STEP Quality of Conversion bill of material blanking in dimensions, modifying BOM breakout views broken views

C callouts modifying geometry modifying graphism CATDrawing documents creating loading and saving with resolved link loading and saving with unresolved link managing opening updating via the batch monitor center lines creating with axis lines creating with no reference creating with reference modifying CGM Export export


Index

import cgm extension CGR views chamfer detecting dimensions, creating Choice of Standard DXF/DWG clipping view profiles, creating clipping views, creating CMG insert colors (geometry creation settings) command 1 Symbol Add an Interruption Advanced Front View Align Views Using Elements Aligned Section Cut Aligned Section View Area Fill Arrow Auxiliary View Axis Line Axis Line and Center Line Balloon Breakout View Broken View Center Line Center Line with Reference Chamfer Dimensions Clipping View


Index

Clipping View Profile Coordinate Dimension Coordinate Dimension Table Copy Object Format Create Interruption(s) Cumulated Dimensions Datum Feature Datum Target Detail View Detail View Profile Dimension Dimension Positioning Exploded View Extend to Center Frame Frame and Title Block Frame Creation Front View Generate Balloons Generate Dimensions Geometrical Tolerance Half Dimension Hole Dimension Table Import a generative view style Invert Profile Direction Isolate Isometric View Line-Up Locate Reference View Locate Resulting View Offset Section Cut Offset Section View


Index

Position and Orientation Position Independently of Reference View Projection View Query Object Links Quick Detail View Quick Detail View Profile Radius Center Remove Interruption(s) Remove One Interruption Re-route Dimension Restore Deleted Roughness Symbol Search Set Relative Position Show Geometry in All Viewpoints Stacked Dimensions Superpose Swap to Radius Symbol Shape Table Text Text Properties Text with Leader Thread Thread Dimension Thread with Reference Unfolded View View From 3D Weld Wizard constraints creation (geometry creation settings) constraints display (geometry creation settings)


Index

constraints, driving via dimensions coordinate dimension table coordinate dimensions, creating and modifying copying geometrical tolerances graphic properties creating advanced front views aligned section cuts aligned section views angle dimensions area fills arrows associated text associative balloons on views from products associative thread dimensions auxiliary views axis and center lines axis lines balloons breakout views broken views center lines with no reference center lines with reference chamfer dimensions clipping view profiles clipping views coordinate dimensions cumulated dimensions curvilinear length dimensions datum features datum targets detail view profiles http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/draug_C2/draugix.htm (7 of 25)10/20/2004 5:49:45 PM

Index

detail views dimensions dimensions along a reference direction dimensions between element and view axis dimensions between intersection points driving dimensions explicit dimensions exploded views frame and title blocks free text front views generative view styles geometrical tolerances half dimensions holes dimensions table isometric views offset section cuts offset section views overall curve dimensions points coordinates table projection views quick detail view profiles quick detail views radius curvature dimensions roughness symbols section cuts (planar surface) section cuts with profile defined in 3D section views (planar surface) section views with profile defined in 3D stacked dimensions tables text frames


Index

text with a leader threads with no reference threads with reference unfolded views views views from 3D views from a .model views using generative view styles views via the wizard welding symbols welds creating drawings cumulated dimensions, creating curvilinear length dimensions, creating customizing administration settings annotation and dress-up settings dimension creation settings general settings generation settings generative view styles geometry creation settings manipulators settings toolbars view and sheet layout settings view generation settings

D datum features creating modifying datum targets http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/draug_C2/draugix.htm (9 of 25)10/20/2004 5:49:45 PM

Index

creating modifying defining sheets Design mode defining using detail view profiles, creating detail views, creating detecting chamfer dimension creation (dimension settings) dimension creation settings dimension generation (generation settings) Dimension Generation toolbar dimension manipulators (manipulators settings) dimensions along a reference direction analyzing generated dimensions analyzing interfering dimensions angle dimensions associative thread dimensions between element and view axis between intersection points chamfer dimensions coordinate dimensions creating cumulated dimensions curvilinear length dimensions dimension extension line properties dimension line properties dimension text properties dimension tolerance properties driving 3D constraints editing dimension value properties http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/draug_C2/draugix.htm (10 of 25)10/20/2004 5:49:45 PM

Index

explicit dimensions filtering dimension generation generate dimensions in one shot generate dimensions semi-automatically generating from 3D constraints generation overview half dimensions holes dimensions table lining up (free space) lining up (reference) modifying blanking modifying dimension line location modifying dimension type modifying overrun modifying text before/after modifying value text position overall curve dimensions overview positioning (view per view) radius curvature dimensions re-routing searching dimension status specifying value position stacked dimensions display settings documents printing after modifying display settings printing quickly drawing management (administration settings) Drawing toolbar drawings creating loading and saving with resolved link http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/draug_C2/draugix.htm (11 of 25)10/20/2004 5:49:45 PM

Index

loading and saving with unresolved link managing opening updating via the batch monitor dress-up overview settings dress-up (administration settings) dress-up generation (view generation settings) driving 3D constraints driving dimensions, creating duplicating generative geometry DWG Import DXF/DWG Choice of Standard Export export Export unit Export VBScript Macros Extension Import import Import of multiple viewports and layouts Import VBScript Macros Imported Elements Multi-sheet export Report File Trouble Shooting What about the elements you export DXF/DWG CATIA V4 Trouble Shooting DXF/DWG File Size


Index

Trouble Shooting DXF/DWG Kanji or unicode characters Trouble Shooting DXF/DWG Small Entities Best Practices DXF/DWG VBScript Macros utility

E editing annotation leaders dimension value properties images exact views explicit dimensions, creating exploded views Export CGM DXF/DWG export CGM DXF/DWG file Export unit DXF/DWG Export VBScript Macros DXF/DWG Extension DXF/DWG extension cgm extension lines, interrupting


Index

F file export import filtering dimension generation finding text frame and title blocks creating inserting an image in frames creating for text free text front views creating creating from sub-bodies/sub-products creating with local axis system creating with selection sets

G general settings generated dimensions, analyzing generating balloons bill of material dimensions generation overview settings generative view style (administration settings) Generative view style toolbar generative view styles generative view styles


Index

applying to other views applying to views concepts creating creating views generate parameters importing newer versions structure of switching view styles view dress-up parameters views geometrical tolerances copying creating modifying geometry duplicating showing in views geometry (geometry creation settings) geometry creation settings geometry generation (view generation settings) geometry welds, creating graphic properties copying editing grid

H half dimension, creating handling annotation leaders holes dimensions table, creating


Index

I images editing inserting overview Import DWG DXF/DWG import CGM DXF/DWG file Import of multiple viewports and layouts DXF/DWG Import VBScript Macros DXF/DWG Imported Elements DXF/DWG importing a generative view style importing tables insert CMG inserting images images into a frame and title block views in tables interfering dimensions, analyzing interoperability interrupting extension lines isolating views isometric views


Index

L leaders adding to annotations handling positioning breakpoints line-up (dimension settings) lining up dimensions free space reference loading and saving drawings with resolved link with unresolved link local axis system, creating front views with locating views locking views

M managing drawings generative view styles manipulators (manipulators settings) manipulators settings modifying annotation positioning balloons callout geometry callout graphism center lines coordinate dimensions cut elements in a section view datum features http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/draug_C2/draugix.htm (17 of 25)10/20/2004 5:49:45 PM

Index

datum targets dimension line location dimension text before/after dimension type dimensions overrun and blanking geometrical tolerances patterns tables views views from a .model move (annotation and dress-up settings) move (dimension settings) moving views Multi-sheet export DXF/DWG

N new sheet (view and sheet layout settings)

O objects, querying links occlusion culling offset section cuts offset section views opening drawings orientation of text orientation of views overall curve dimensions, creating overrun in dimensions, modifying


Index

P patterns editing properties modifying points coordinates table positioning dimension value text dimensions (view per view) leader breakpoints positioning views aligning independently of reference view methods relatively superposing printing after modifying display settings overview quickly properties 2D component instance properties 2D element graphic properties 2D geometry feature properties annotation font properties dimension extension line properties dimension line properties dimension text properties dimension tolerance properties dimension value properties pattern properties text properties properties


Index

Q querying object links quick detail view profiles, creating quick detail views, creating

R radius curvature dimensions, creating raster images, inserting raster views relative position for views renaming views replacing text Report File DXF/DWG re-routing dimensions restoring deleted elements roughness symbols, creating ruler (general settings)

S saving drawings (resolved link) drawings (unresolved link) scaling views search (advanced) section cuts (planar surface) section cuts with profile defined in 3D creating


Index

section cuts with profile defined in 3D section views (planar surface) section views with profile defined in 3D section views with profile defined in 3D creating section views, modify cut elements in section/projection callout (view and sheet layout settings) selection sets, creating front views with setting relative position for views settings administration annotation and dress-up dimension creation general generation geometry creation manipulators view and sheet layout view generation sheet layout settings sheets sheets managing background views modify sheets, defining showing geometry in views specifying dimension value position splitting tables stacked dimensions, creating standards STEP Quality of Conversion Best Practices style (administration settings)


Index

sub-bodies/sub-products, creating front views from superposing views

T tables creating creating points coordinates table importing inserting views in modifying splitting text associated text creating frames creating free text creating text with a leader editing properties finding and replacing making an existing text associative replicating text and attribute specifying orientation text before/after dimension value, modifying threads associative thread dimensions creating with no reference creating with reference toolbars customizing Dimension Generation Drawing Generative view style Views


Index

Trouble Shooting DXF/DWG DXF/DWG CATIA V4 DXF/DWG File Size DXF/DWG Kanji or unicode characters

U unfolded views, creating updating drawings via the batch monitor utility DXF/DWG VBScript Macros UpdateBatch

V vector images, inserting view axis (general settings) view creation (view and sheet layout settings) view generation settings view generation (view generation settings) view layout settings views active view advanced front views aligned section cuts aligned section views aligning applying generative view styles applying generative view styles to other views auxiliary views breakout views http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/draug_C2/draugix.htm (23 of 25)10/20/2004 5:49:45 PM

Index

broken views clipping view profiles clipping views creating creating and modifying from a .model creating via the wizard detail view profiles detail views dress-up exploded views front views front views from sub-bodies/sub-products front views with local axis system front views with selection sets generating Approximate views generating balloons on generating CGR views generating exact views generating raster views generative view styles inserting in tables isolating isometric views locating views locking managing background views modifying modifying cut elements in a section view moving views offset section cuts offset section views orientation


Index

positioning positioning independently of reference view projection views quick detail view profiles quick detail views renaming views restoring deleted elements scaling views section cuts (planar surface) section cuts with profile defined in 3D section views (planar surface) section views with profile defined in 3D setting relative position showing geometry in views superposing switching generative view styles unfolded views using generative view styles view from 3D Views toolbar Visualization mode improving performance saving memory

W welding symbols, creating welds, creating What about the elements you export DXF/DWG wizard for creating views


Catia V5 Mechanical Design Solutions 2

Recommend Documents